WO2021065134A1 - Imaging device and control method - Google Patents

Imaging device and control method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021065134A1
WO2021065134A1 PCT/JP2020/026459 JP2020026459W WO2021065134A1 WO 2021065134 A1 WO2021065134 A1 WO 2021065134A1 JP 2020026459 W JP2020026459 W JP 2020026459W WO 2021065134 A1 WO2021065134 A1 WO 2021065134A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
opening
traveling
closing
mode
speed
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/026459
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
正規 塩澤
将文 米田
由也 山崎
Original Assignee
ソニー株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by ソニー株式会社 filed Critical ソニー株式会社
Priority to JP2021550347A priority Critical patent/JPWO2021065134A1/ja
Publication of WO2021065134A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021065134A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/02Bodies
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B9/00Exposure-making shutters; Diaphragms
    • G03B9/08Shutters
    • G03B9/36Sliding rigid plate
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/70Circuitry for compensating brightness variation in the scene

Definitions

  • This technology relates to an image pickup device in which an opening / closing blade can be driven by both a motor and a spring, and a technical field regarding a control method in the image pickup device.
  • some image pickup devices such as still cameras and video cameras are provided with a blade opening / closing device (shutter unit) having opening / closing blades for opening / closing an opening through which incident light passing through an imaging surface passes.
  • a blade opening / closing device shutter unit
  • a shutter unit hereinafter referred to as “hybrid shutter” that drives an opening / closing blade by the torque of both a motor and a spring is known.
  • the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade (so-called curtain speed) can be increased, and in particular, there is an advantage in increasing the strobe synchronization speed.
  • curtain speed becomes high, the impact caused by the traveling of the opening / closing blade becomes large, which tends to reduce the quietness during shutter operation and shorten the life of the blade opening / closing device.
  • This technology was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to improve the quietness of the image pickup device in which the switchgear can be driven by both the motor and the spring, and to extend the life of the switchgear switchgear. To do.
  • the first imaging device includes an opening / closing blade that travels in a direction of opening / closing an opening through which incident light passing through an imaging surface passes, a motor provided so as to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade, and a motor.
  • a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade are provided, and the control unit consumes the motor as a traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
  • the mode is switched between a plurality of driving modes having different power sources.
  • the motor power consumption is switched from the high running mode to the low running mode, that is, the running speed of the opening / closing blades is low from the fast running mode. It is possible to switch to the driving mode.
  • the first imaging device described above may be configured to include a capacitor that serves as a driving power source for the motor.
  • a capacitor that serves as a driving power source for the motor.
  • the control unit has a first traveling mode and a second traveling mode as traveling modes having different power consumption, and the first traveling mode includes the motor and the traveling spring. Both are modes for transmitting the traveling power, and the second traveling mode is a mode in which the traveling spring transmits the traveling power and the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first traveling mode. It is conceivable to have a configuration. As a result, it can be considered that the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade is a hybrid traveling mode in which the opening / closing blade is driven by the power of both the motor and the traveling spring, and that only the traveling spring drives the opening / closing blade (the motor drives the opening / closing blade). It is possible to switch to the spring running mode (including the case of slightly assisting).
  • the traveling spring is stored by the power of the motor, and the control unit has a first traveling mode and a second traveling mode as traveling modes having different power consumption.
  • the first traveling mode may be configured such that the number of times the capacitor is charged is less than that of the second traveling mode.
  • the control unit selects the traveling mode based on any of the parameters of the traveling speed, the continuous shooting speed, and the shutter speed of the opening / closing blade. For example, a mode with high motor power consumption should be selected to increase the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades, and a mode with low motor power consumption (that is, a mode with a short charging time) should be selected to increase the continuous shooting speed. You should choose. Further, when increasing the shutter speed, it may be necessary to select a mode in which the motor power consumption is high.
  • the control unit selects the traveling mode based on the parameter of the shutter speed as the strobe synchronization speed.
  • the strobe tuning speed is a speed that cannot be achieved in the driving mode with low motor power consumption
  • the driving mode with high motor power consumption is selected, and conversely, in the driving mode with low motor power consumption.
  • the speed is feasible, it is possible to select a driving mode with low motor power consumption to improve the continuous shooting speed.
  • the control unit has, as the traveling mode, a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode, and the traveling of the opening / closing blade.
  • the second mode is selected as the traveling mode.
  • the control unit has, as the traveling mode, a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode, and determines the continuous shooting speed.
  • the traveling mode a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode, and determines the continuous shooting speed.
  • the control unit is configured to control the charging time of the capacitor as a control different from the switching of the traveling mode.
  • the charging time of the capacitor By adjusting the charging time of the capacitor, it is possible to change the time required from the start of the release to the start of the next release, that is, the continuous shooting speed can be changed, and the output of the motor can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to change the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade.
  • the control unit controls to adjust the charging current of the capacitor based on the remaining amount of the battery which is the operating power source of the imaging device.
  • the current value of the charging current is increased to increase the running speed of the opening / closing blades, and the remaining battery power is low and the battery does not have sufficient power supply capacity. In that case, it is possible to reduce the current value of the charging current to prevent the output voltage of the battery from dropping unnecessarily.
  • control unit is configured to control the charging voltage of the capacitor.
  • the magnitude of the motor output is adjusted, that is, the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is adjusted, and by adjusting the charging time of the capacitor, the continuous shooting speed is adjusted.
  • control unit is configured to control adjusting the drive current of the motor.
  • the magnitude of the motor output is adjusted, that is, the traveling speed of the on-off blades is adjusted, and the continuous shooting speed is adjusted by adjusting the charging time of the capacitor.
  • the capacitor is charged even during the discharge period of the capacitor. As a result, the waiting period until the release can be started can be shortened.
  • the first control method is an opening / closing blade that travels in a direction of opening / closing an opening through which incident light passing through an imaging surface passes, and a motor provided so as to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade.
  • a control method in an imaging device including a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade, wherein the control unit opens / closes the opening / closing.
  • This is a control method for switching between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the blades. Even with such a first control method, the same operation as that of the first image pickup apparatus described above can be obtained.
  • the second imaging device can transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blades that travel in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction in which the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, and the opening / closing blades.
  • a motor provided, a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade, and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade are provided, and the control unit comprises a traveling mode of the opening / closing blade. The mode is switched between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades are different.
  • the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring can be switched from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is high to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low.
  • the second control method is provided with an opening / closing blade that travels in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction in which the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, and a traveling power that can be transmitted to the opening / closing blade.
  • the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade is a control method for switching the mode between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is different. Even with such a second control method, the same operation as that of the above-mentioned second imaging device can be obtained.
  • the third imaging device includes an opening / closing blade that operates in the opening / closing direction to open / close the opening, a coil to which a driving current is supplied, a magnet that is rotated by energizing the coil, and the magnet.
  • a motor having a rotor gear that is rotated with the rotation of the magnet, a drive body that has a drive gear that is meshed with the rotor gear and is rotated in the opposite direction to the magnet, and a drive body that rotates in the opposite direction to the magnet.
  • the blade opening / closing unit is provided with a traveling spring that applies an urging force to one of the opening / closing blades in the opening / closing direction, and the opening / closing blade is operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotation operation of the drive body.
  • the control unit includes a control unit that controls the traveling of the opening / closing blade, and the control unit switches the mode between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
  • the opening / closing blade can be driven by the driving force of the motor generated by energizing the coil and the urging force of the traveling spring in the driving body.
  • the switching from the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is high to the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is low that is, the opening / closing blades It is possible to switch from a running mode with a high running speed to a running mode with a low running speed.
  • the fourth imaging device includes an opening / closing blade that operates in the opening / closing direction to open / close the opening, a coil to which a driving current is supplied, a magnet that is rotated by energizing the coil, and the magnet.
  • a motor having a rotor gear that is rotated with the rotation of the magnet, a drive body that has a drive gear meshed with the rotor gear and is rotated in the opposite direction to the magnet, and the drive body.
  • the blade opening / closing unit is provided with a traveling spring that applies an urging force to one of the opening / closing blades in the opening / closing direction, and the opening / closing blade is operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotational operation of the drive body.
  • the control unit includes a control unit that controls the traveling of the opening / closing blades, and the control unit switches the mode between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades are different as the traveling modes of the opening / closing blades.
  • the opening / closing blade can be driven by the driving force of the motor generated by energizing the coil and the urging force of the traveling spring in the driving body.
  • the above-mentioned control unit makes it possible to switch the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is fast to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low. ..
  • FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a magnet, a gear body, and a drive body as viewed from a direction different from that of FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view which shows the lock operation unit.
  • FIG. 15 to 18 show the operation of the blade opening / closing device, and this figure is a rear view showing an initial state of the drive mechanism. It is a rear view which shows the state of the drive mechanism immediately after the closing operation of an opening / closing blade is started.
  • FIG. 15 is a rear view showing a state in which the opening / closing blades are closed and the connecting shaft of the driving body is in contact with the brake lever.
  • FIG. 16 is a rear view showing a state in which the opening / closing blades are closed, the drive body is decelerated by the brake lever, and the unlocked body is pressed by the pressing shaft of the brake lever. It is a rear view which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time of opening operation of an opening / closing vane. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the lock operation unit which concerns on a modification.
  • FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a lock operation unit according to a modified example as viewed from a direction different from that of FIG.
  • FIG. 22 to 26 show the operation of the blade opening / closing device using the lock operation unit according to the modified example, and this figure is a rear view showing the initial state of the drive mechanism. It is a rear view which shows the state of the drive mechanism immediately after the closing operation of an opening / closing blade is started.
  • FIG. 22 is a rear view showing a state in which the opening / closing blades are closed and the connecting shaft of the driving body is in contact with the brake lever.
  • FIG. 23 is a rear view showing a state in which the opening / closing blades are closed, the drive body is decelerated by the brake lever, and the release arm is pressed by the pressing shaft of the brake lever.
  • FIG. 22 to 26 show the operation of the blade opening / closing device using the lock operation unit according to the modified example, and this figure is a rear view showing the initial state of the drive mechanism. It is a rear view which shows the state of the drive mechanism immediately after the closing operation of an opening / closing blade is started.
  • FIG. 22 is a rear view
  • FIG. 24 is a rear view showing a state in which the release arm and the holding lever are rotated to the lock holding position following FIG. 24. It is a rear view which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time of opening operation of an opening / closing vane.
  • It is a block diagram which showed the electric internal structure example of the image pickup apparatus as an embodiment. It is a figure which showed the circuit structure example of the drive system of the magnetic drive part (motor) in this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating operation for each traveling mode. It is a flowchart which showed the process for switching a running mode according to a strobe tuning speed. It is a figure for demonstrating the definition of Hi / Low of a shutter speed, a curtain speed, and a frame speed in control example I.
  • Control Example I A combination of shutter speed, curtain speed, and frame speed settings in Control Example I is shown. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process as control example I. Similarly, it is a flowchart for demonstrating the process as control example I. Similarly, it is a flowchart for demonstrating the process as control example I. It is a figure which showed the circuit structure example of the drive system of the magnetic drive part in the image pickup apparatus as a 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the image of adjustment in the 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the image of adjustment as a 2nd modification. It is a figure which showed the circuit structure example of the drive system of the magnetic drive part in the image pickup apparatus as a 2nd modification.
  • the imaging device according to the present technology is applied to a still camera
  • the blade opening / closing device (blade opening / closing unit) according to the present technology is applied to a focal plane shutter provided in the still camera.
  • the image pickup device is a digital camera provided with an image pickup element
  • the focal plane shutter is formed as an electronic front curtain in which the traveling of the front curtain is realized by resetting the charge of the image pickup element.
  • An example is given in which the running of the curtain is realized as the running of the opening / closing blade.
  • the scope of application of this technology is not limited to still cameras and focal plane shutters provided in still cameras, and is provided in, for example, various image pickup devices incorporated in video cameras and other devices, and these image pickup devices. It can be widely applied to various blade opening / closing devices such as irises.
  • the direction as seen from the user as a photographer who shoots with a still camera shall indicate the front-back, up-down, left-right directions. Therefore, the subject side is the front side and the user side is the rear side.
  • the lens group shown below may include those composed of a single or a plurality of lenses, these single or a plurality of lenses, and other optical elements such as an iris.
  • the image pickup apparatus 1 is composed of, for example, required parts arranged inside and outside a horizontally long flat housing 2.
  • the image pickup device 1 may be a device in which the interchangeable lens 200 can be attached and detached.
  • a flash (strobe) 3 is provided on the front surface of the housing 2.
  • a shutter button 4, a zoom switch 5, and a power button 6 are provided on the upper surface of the housing 2 (see FIGS. 1 and 2).
  • a display 7, various operation units 8, 8, ..., And a finder 9 are provided on the rear surface of the housing 2.
  • an optical system 10 having a lens group, an optical element, and the like, and specifically, an image sensor 12 that controls the amount of light taken in by the optical system 10.
  • the blade opening / closing device (blade opening / closing unit: focal plane shutter in this example) 11 that can shield the light incident on the image pickup surface, and the image sensor 12 that photoelectrically converts the light captured through the blade opening / closing device 11 They are arranged in order from the front side.
  • the configuration of the blade opening / closing device 11 will be described below (see FIGS. 4 to 13).
  • the blade opening / closing device 11 has a base body 13, a pressing plate 14, opening / closing blades 15, links 16, 16 and a drive mechanism 17, and is arranged on the front surface side of the image pickup element 12 (see FIGS. 4 to 6).
  • the base body 13 is formed, for example, in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and has a rectangular opening 13a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIGS. 4 and 5).
  • the opening 13a is one size larger than the effective incident region of light on the image pickup surface of the image pickup device 12.
  • the effective incident region of light on the imaging surface is a region in which light captured by the optical system 10 and necessary for generating an image is incident.
  • the lower portion of the opening 13a in the base body 13 is provided as a holding portion 18 serving as a holding region in which the opening / closing blade 15 is held in the open position, and one side portion of the opening 13a in the base body 13 is used as the mounting portion 19. It is provided.
  • the image sensor 12 is arranged on the rear side of the base body 13.
  • Support pins 19a and 19a projecting forward are provided at the lateral ends of the mounting portion 19 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction.
  • a shaft moving hole 19b is formed in the mounting portion 19, and the shaft moving hole 19b is formed in a substantially arc shape.
  • the holding plate 14 is formed in substantially the same size and shape as the base body 13 and has a through hole 14a.
  • the holding plate 14 is attached to the base body 13 from the front side with the opening / closing blade 15 sandwiched between them.
  • the opening 13a is located directly behind the transmission hole 14a.
  • a relief hole 14b is formed in the holding plate 14, and the relief hole 14b is formed in an arc shape.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 is composed of a plurality of sheet-shaped sectors 15a, 15a, ... (See FIG. 5).
  • a combination of an electronic curtain that functions as a front curtain by controlling the image sensor 12 and an opening / closing blade 15 that is provided as a mechanical structure and functions as a rear curtain is used. It has a so-called electronic front curtain shutter configuration.
  • the sectors 15a, 15a, ... are formed in a horizontally long shape, and for example, four sectors are provided. At least a part of the sectors 15a, 15a, ...
  • the opening / closing blade 15 is positioned so as to overlap each other in the thickness direction.
  • the sectors 15a, 15a, ... Are rotatably connected to both links 16 and 16, respectively.
  • the links 16 and 16 are formed in a sheet shape and function as parallel links. Support holes 16a and 16a are formed in the links 16 and 16 at one end in the longitudinal direction, respectively. One link 16 is formed with an elongated connecting hole 16b at a portion closer to one end in the longitudinal direction.
  • the links 16 and 16 have the support pins 19a and 19a of the base body 13 inserted into the support holes 16a and 16a, respectively, and are rotated with respect to the base plate 13 and the holding plate 14 with the support pins 19a and 19a as fulcrums.
  • the links 16 and 16 are rotated with respect to the base plate 13 and the holding plate 14 while maintaining a parallel state by the driving force of the driving mechanism 17.
  • the links 16 and 16 are rotated, the sectors 15a, 15a, ... Are moved (traveled) substantially in the vertical direction.
  • the movement amounts of the sectors 15a, 15a, ... are different, the overlapping area is changed, and the opening position (see FIG. 6) for opening the opening 13a of the base body 13 and the closing position for closing the opening 13a (see FIG. 7). ) Is opened and closed.
  • the blade opening / closing device 11 can be sufficiently miniaturized in the moving direction of the opening / closing blades 15. An opening 13a having a large size can be formed.
  • a sheet (not shown) having a light transmitting hole located corresponding to the opening 13a is arranged between the opening / closing blade 15 and the front surface of the base body 13 and between the opening / closing blade 15 and the rear surface of the holding plate 14, respectively. , These sheets facilitate the operation of the opening / closing blade 15.
  • the drive mechanism 17 is configured by arranging the required parts on the arrangement base 20 (see FIGS. 5, 8 and 9).
  • the arrangement base 20 is formed in a vertically long plate shape facing the front-rear direction.
  • a shaft operating hole 20a is formed in the arrangement base 20 at a position near the lower end (see FIGS. 8 and 9).
  • the arrangement base 20 is attached to the attachment portion 19 of the base body 13 from the rear.
  • a spring support shaft 21, a rotor shaft 22, a drive shaft 23, and a lock shaft 24 are attached to the arrangement base 20.
  • the spring support shaft 21, the rotor shaft 22, the drive shaft 23, and the lock shaft 24 are respectively projected rearward from the arrangement base 20.
  • a brake support shaft 25 and a stopper 26 are attached to the rear surface of the arrangement base 20, and the brake support shaft 25 and the stopper 26 are located around the shaft operating hole 20a.
  • the drive mechanism 17 is provided with a magnetic drive unit (motor) 27.
  • the magnetic drive unit 27 has a mounting plate 28, a first yoke 29, a second yoke 30, a coil 31, and a magnet 32.
  • the mounting plate 28 is oriented in the front-rear direction, and the first yoke 29 and the second yoke 30 are attached to the mounting plate 28.
  • the first yoke 29 is formed with magnet arrangement holes 29a penetrating the front and rear.
  • the first yoke 29 is attached to the upper half of the rear surface of the placement base 20.
  • the second yoke 30 has a base portion 30a formed in a plate shape facing in the vertical direction and a core portion 30b protruding downward from the base portion 30a, and the base portion 30a is located above the first yoke 29. ..
  • the coil 31 is arranged in a state of being wound around the core portion 30b, and functions as a stator.
  • the magnet 32 functions as a rotor and is formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction in the front-rear direction (see FIGS. 10 and 11).
  • a rotor rotor gear 33 is attached to one end surface of the magnet 32 in the axial direction.
  • the magnet 32 and the rotor gear 33 are supported by the rotor shaft 22, and are integrally rotatable around the rotor shaft 22 as a fulcrum.
  • the magnet 32 is inserted into the magnet placement hole 29a and placed in a state where the first yoke 29 is attached to the placement base 20.
  • the magnet 32 and the rotor gear 33 are integrally rotated in a direction corresponding to the direction (polarity) of the current.
  • the magnet 32 and the rotor gear 33 are rotated in synchronization with the drive body 34.
  • the drive body 34 has a drive gear 35, a drive lever 36, and a supported shaft portion 37, and is rotatable.
  • the drive gear 35 is a spur gear.
  • the drive gear 35 is provided with a spring hooking portion 35a by projecting rearward from a part of the outer peripheral portion.
  • the drive lever 36 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined shape, and has a coupling base 36a extending in one direction and a protrusion 36b protruding from the central portion in the longitudinal direction of the coupling base 36a.
  • a through hole (not shown) is formed at one end of the coupling base 36a in the longitudinal direction.
  • the protrusion 36b projects in a direction orthogonal to the coupling base 36a.
  • a connecting shaft 38 projecting forward is attached to the other end of the coupling base 36a in the longitudinal direction.
  • a return shaft 39 projecting forward is attached to the protrusion 36b.
  • a notch is formed at the other end of the coupling base 36a in the longitudinal direction, and the locked portion 36c is formed by this notch.
  • the edge of the coupling base 36a on the locked portion 36c side is formed as a sliding inclined edge 36d.
  • One end of the coupling base 36a of the drive lever 36 is coupled to the rear surface of the drive gear 35, and the through hole coincides with the center hole of the drive gear 35.
  • the coupling shaft 38 and the return shaft 39 are located on the outer peripheral side of the drive gear 35.
  • the supported shaft portion 37 has a cylindrical portion 37a formed in a cylindrical shape whose axial direction is the front-rear direction, and a flange portion 37b protruding outward from one end portion in the axial direction of the tubular portion 37a. There is.
  • the supported shaft portion 37 has a flange portion 37b coupled to one end of the coupling base 36a and is positioned coaxially with the drive gear 35.
  • the drive body 34 is urged in one direction in the rotation direction by the traveling spring 40.
  • the traveling spring 40 is, for example, a torsion coil spring, and is supported by a tubular portion 37a of a supported shaft portion 37.
  • One end of the traveling spring 40 is engaged with, for example, a part of the mounting plate 28 in the magnetic drive unit 27, and the other end is engaged with the spring hooking portion 35a of the drive gear 35.
  • the drive body 34 is supported by the drive shaft 23 and is rotatable around the drive shaft 23 as a fulcrum.
  • the drive body 34 is urged in one rotation direction by the traveling spring 40, and the drive gear 35, the drive lever 36, and the supported shaft portion 37 are integrated and one rotation is performed by the urging force (driving force) of the traveling spring 40. It is made rotatable in the direction of movement.
  • the drive body 34 is located between the first rotating end, which is the rotating end in the direction opposite to the urging force of the traveling spring 40, and the second rotating end, which is the rotating end in the direction of the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated.
  • the drive gear 35 is meshed with the rotor gear 33 of the magnetic drive unit 27. Therefore, the rotor 32 and the rotor gear 33 of the magnetic drive unit 27 are rotated in synchronization with the drive body 34 in the opposite direction.
  • the drive mechanism 17 is provided with a lock operation unit 41 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).
  • the locking operation unit 41 has an unlocking body 42 and a locking member 43 (see FIGS. 12 and 13).
  • the unlocking body 42 has an unlocking base 44 and a suction piece 45, and is rotatable between a lock holding position and an unlocking position.
  • the release base 44 has a plate-shaped base surface portion 46 that faces substantially vertically, a first support surface portion 47 that is bent upward with respect to the base surface portion 46, and a second support surface portion that is bent upward with respect to the base surface portion 46.
  • the first support surface portion 47 and the second support surface portion 48 are positioned so as to face each other in the front-rear direction, and the first support surface portion 47 is located behind the second support surface portion 48.
  • a part of the first support surface portion 47 is provided as a first spring receiving portion 47a projecting laterally from the base surface portion 46, and a part of the second support surface portion 48 projects laterally from the base surface portion 46. It is provided as a second spring receiving portion 48a, and the first spring receiving portion 47a and the second spring receiving portion 48a are positioned so as to face each other in the front-rear direction.
  • the other part of the second support surface portion 48 is projected from the base surface portion 46 in the direction opposite to the second spring receiving portion 48a on the side, and this protruding portion is provided as the release receiving portion 48b.
  • the first support surface portion 47 is provided with a regulation protrusion 48c protruding downward from the release receiving portion 48b.
  • a substantially cylindrical first spring support member 49 and a second spring support member 50 are attached to the first spring receiving portion 47a and the second spring receiving portion 48a, respectively.
  • the unlocking spring 51 is supported by the first spring supporting member 49.
  • the unlocking spring 51 is, for example, a torsion coil spring, one end of which is engaged with a spring support shaft 21 attached to the arrangement base 20, and the other end of which is engaged with a first support surface portion 47.
  • the suction piece 45 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is fixed to the base surface portion 46 of the release base 44 via the fixed shaft 52.
  • the suction piece 45 is located on the upper surface side of one end portion of the base surface portion 46 in the left-right direction.
  • the lock member 43 is orthogonal to the supported plate portion 53 and the supported plate portion 53 located on the front side of the release base 44 facing the second support surface portion 48, and the base surface portion 46 is located on the lower side of the release base 44. It has a pressed plate portion 54 positioned so as to face the front end portion. A shaft insertion hole 53a is formed in the supported plate portion 53 through the front and rear. The supported plate portion 53 is provided with a lock portion 53b protruding downward. The lock member 43 is rotatable between a locked position and a non-locked position.
  • a lock spring 55 is supported by the second spring support member 50.
  • the spring force of the lock spring 55 is smaller than the spring force of the unlock spring 51.
  • the lock spring 55 is, for example, a torsion coil spring, one end of which is engaged with the second support surface portion 48 of the release base 44, and the other end of which is engaged with the supported plate portion 53 of the lock member 43.
  • the lock operation unit 41 is inserted into the lock shaft 24 by inserting the lock shaft 24 attached to the arrangement base 20 into the shaft insertion hole 53a of the lock member 43, the first spring support member 49, and the second spring support member 50. It is supported, and the unlocking body 42 and the locking member 43 are individually rotatable around the lock shaft 24 as a fulcrum.
  • the lock release body 42 is urged by the lock release spring 51 in a direction in which the base surface portion 46 approaches the pressed portion plate 54 of the lock member 43.
  • the lock member 43 is urged by the lock spring 55 in the direction in which the pressed portion plate 54 approaches the base surface portion 46. Therefore, the urging directions of the lock release spring 51 and the lock spring 55 are opposite to each other in the rotation direction of the lock operation unit 41, and a force other than the urging force is applied to the lock release body 42 and the lock member 43 in the rotation direction.
  • the pressed plate portion 54 of the lock member 43 is pressed against the regulation protrusion 48c of the unlocking body 42.
  • the electromagnet 56 has a magnetic force generating portion 57 formed in a bifurcated shape and a pair of coil portions 58, 58.
  • the magnetic force generating portion 57 is provided as a pair of suction portions 57a and 57a in which bifurcated portions are lined up in the front-rear direction, and the coil portions 58 and 58 are wound around the suction portions 57a and 57a, respectively.
  • the electromagnet 56 is attached to, for example, the mounting plate 28.
  • the unlocked body 42 is positioned so that the tip surfaces of the suction portions 57a and 57a face the upper surface of the suction piece 45.
  • the suction force on the suction piece 45 disappears when the coil portions 58 and 58 are energized, and the suction force on the suction piece 45 is generated when the energization on the coil portions 58 and 58 is stopped.
  • the drive mechanism 17 is provided with a brake lever 59 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).
  • the brake lever 59 is formed in a substantially V shape and is rotatable around a brake support shaft 25 attached to the arrangement base 20 as a fulcrum. The brake lever 59 is rotated between the deceleration start position at which the drive body 34 starts deceleration and the rotation stop position at which the rotation is stopped.
  • the V-shaped bent portion of the brake lever 59 is supported by the brake support shaft 25.
  • the brake lever 59 is provided with a portion extending from the portion supported by the brake support shaft 25 to one side as a brake arm 60, and a portion extending from the portion supported by the brake support shaft 28 to the other side as an action arm 61. ..
  • a pressing shaft 62 is rotatably supported at the tip of the acting arm 61, for example.
  • the brake lever 59 is supported by a support pin 64 via a pressurizing spring 63 on the brake support shaft 25. Therefore, the brake lever 59 is supported by the pressurization spring 63 in a state where a constant load is applied to the arrangement base 20, and a rotational force larger than the frictional force with the arrangement base 20 generated by the pressurization spring 63 is applied. At that time, it is rotated with respect to the arrangement base 20.
  • the first yoke 29 and the second yoke 30 of the magnetic drive unit 27 are It is attached to the upper half of the placement base 20.
  • the magnet 32 is inserted into the magnet arrangement hole 29a of the first yoke 29, and the connecting shaft 38 and the return shaft 39 attached to the drive lever 36 are forward from the shaft operation hole 20a of the arrangement base 20. (See FIG. 5).
  • the arrangement base 20 is attached to the mounting portion 19 of the base body 13 from the rear, and the connecting shaft 38 projects forward from the shaft moving hole 19b of the base body 13 to the escape hole 14b of the holding plate 14. Will be inserted.
  • the connecting shaft 38 is inserted into a connecting hole 16b formed in one of the links 16. Therefore, when the drive body 34 is rotated, the connecting shaft 38 is moved, the links 16 and 16 are rotated while maintaining the parallel state, and the sectors 15a, 15a, ... ⁇ ⁇ Is moved in the vertical direction.
  • the coil 31 is not energized, the magnetic drive unit 27 is not generating a driving force, and the rotation of the magnet 32 is stopped. Has been made.
  • the electromagnet 56 is not energized, and a magnetic force is generated in the magnetic force generating portion 57. Therefore, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the magnetic force generating portion 57, and the suction piece 45 is attracted by the suction portions 57a and 57a. Therefore, the unlocking body 42 is held at the lock holding position.
  • the lock member 43 is given an urging force in the direction in which the pressed portion plate 54 approaches the base surface portion 46 by the lock spring 55, and the pressed plate portion 54 presses against the regulation protrusion 48c of the unlocked body 42.
  • the lock member 43 is held at the lock position.
  • the image sensor 12 is in a state (non-exposure state) in which the exposure operation (charge accumulation) is not performed by the electronic curtain (front curtain).
  • the brake lever 59 In the initial state, the brake lever 59 is held at the deceleration start position, the brake arm 60 is separated from the connecting shaft 38 attached to the drive lever 36 of the drive body 34, and the pressing shaft 62 attached to the action arm 61 The release base 44 is separated from the release receiving portion 48b of the second support surface portion 48.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 can be operated by both the driving force of the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force of the traveling spring 40, and the opening / closing blade 15 can be operated only by the driving force of the traveling spring 40. It is also possible to operate the opening / closing blade 15. An example in which the opening / closing blade 15 is rotated from the open position to the closed position by both the driving force of the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force of the traveling spring 40 will be described below. Further, the operation from the closed position to the open position of the opening / closing blade 15 is performed by the driving force of the magnetic driving unit 27.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 When the electromagnet 56 is energized, the operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the open position to the closed position is started.
  • the electronic curtain is controlled according to the operating speed of the opening / closing blade 15 in a state where a slit is formed between the electronic curtain and the opening / closing blade 15.
  • Light is incident on the image pickup device 12 through the formed slit to perform exposure.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 is not blocked by either the front curtain or the rear curtain so that the opening / closing blade 15 starts traveling after the end of the traveling of the electronic curtain (that is, the opening 13a is not blocked).
  • the traveling operation of the electronic curtain and the opening / closing blade 15 may be controlled (so that a period during which the electronic curtain is fully opened can be obtained).
  • the electromagnet 56 When the electromagnet 56 is energized, the magnetic force generated in the magnetic force generating unit 57 disappears, and the suction pieces 45 are released from being attracted by the suction parts 57a and 57a. Therefore, the unlocking body 42 is rotated from the lock holding position to the unlocked position by the urging force of the unlocking spring 51.
  • the unlocked body 42 rotated toward the unlocked position is partially attached to the arrangement base 20 or comes into contact with a rotation restricting portion (not shown) formed on the arrangement base 20 to stop rotation and the unlocked position. Is held in.
  • the lock member 43 that has been rotated integrally with the unlocked body 42 toward the unlocked position is stopped rotating along with the unlocked body 42 and is held in the unlocked position.
  • the drive body 34 is rotated from the first rotation end to the second rotation by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated toward the moving end, and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40 is transmitted to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34, and the opening / closing blade 15 is closed from the open position as the driving body 34 rotates. It is operated toward the position.
  • the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 is energized at the same time as the electromagnet 56 is energized, and the magnet 32 functioning as a rotor and the rotor gear 33 are integrally rotated in the direction opposite to the drive body 34, and the magnetic drive unit is energized.
  • the driving force generated in 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34. Therefore, the opening / closing blade 15 is operated by both the driving force generated by the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40, and is operated at high speed from the open position to the closed position. ..
  • the coil 31 is energized, and the opening / closing blade 15 is further operated toward the closed position (see FIG. 16).
  • the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are continuously rotated in opposite directions in synchronization with each other, and the drive body 34 is further rotated toward the second rotation end by the urging force of the traveling spring 40.
  • the drive body 34 further rotated toward the second rotation end is brought into contact with the brake arm 60 of the brake lever 59 whose connecting shaft 38 attached to the drive lever 36 is held at the deceleration start position, and the brake lever 59 is pressed against the connecting shaft 38 and is rotated from the deceleration start position to the rotation stop position against the frictional force. Therefore, the rotation speed of the drive body 34 is gradually reduced by the brake lever 59 as it approaches the second rotation end, and the operating speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is also gradually reduced as it approaches the closed position.
  • the pressing shaft 62 is brought into contact with the unlocking receiving portion 48b of the unlocking body 42 by the rotation of the brake lever 59.
  • the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59 comes into contact with the unlocking receiving portion 48b of the unlocking body 42, the energization of the electromagnet 56 is stopped. Therefore, the magnetic force is generated again in the magnetic force generating unit 57.
  • the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are synchronously rotated in opposite directions, the brake lever 59 is pressed by the connecting shaft 38 and continuously rotated, and the brake arm 60 is attached to the stopper 26 attached to the arrangement base 20. The rotation of the brake lever 59 is stopped in contact with the brake lever 59 (see FIG. 17).
  • the brake lever 59 is held in the rotation stop position by coming into contact with the stopper 26, and the rotation of the drive body 34, the magnet 32, and the rotor gear 33 is stopped when the rotation of the brake lever 59 is stopped, and the drive body 34 is moved. It is held at the second rotating end. At this time, the energization of the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 is stopped.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 operated by the rotation of the driving body 34 reaches the closing position and from the opening position to the closing position of the opening / closing blade 15. Is completed, and the opening 13a of the base body 13 is closed.
  • the energization of the electromagnet 56 is stopped and a magnetic force is generated in the magnetic force generating portion 57. Therefore, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the magnetic force generating unit 57, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the suction parts 57a and 57a, the unlocking body 42 is rotated to the lock holding position, and the lock member 43 returns to the initial state and the lock member 43 is in the lock position. It is rotated to return to the initial state.
  • the operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the closed position to the open position is started by energizing the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the opposite direction (energization due to the opposite polarity) (see FIG. 18). ..
  • the driving force generated in the magnetic driving unit 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the driving body 34, and the driving body 34 is subjected to the second force against the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated from the rotating end to the first rotating end to return to the initial state, and the driving force generated in the magnetic drive unit 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34, and the opening / closing blade 15 Is operated from the closed position to the open position.
  • the traveling spring 40 as the torsion coil spring is wound up, and the urging force on the drive body 34 is increased. To go. That is, the traveling spring 40 is wound up by the power of the magnetic drive unit 27 and stored (that is, the power is charged).
  • the connecting shaft 38 of the drive body 34 is separated from the brake arm 60, but the return shaft 39 of the drive body 34 brakes.
  • the arm 60 is contacted from the direction opposite to the contact direction of the connecting shaft 38, and the brake lever 59 is rotated from the rotation stop position to the deceleration start position by the return shaft 39 to return to the initial state.
  • the brake lever 59 is rotated from the rotation stop position to the deceleration start position, so that the pressing shaft 62 is separated from the release receiving portion 48b of the release base 44.
  • the lock member 43 When the drive body 34 is rotated from the second rotating end to the first rotating end, the lock member 43 is rotated from the unlocked position to the locked position, and the sliding inclined edge 36d of the drive lever 36d. Is slid on the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43, and the lock member 43 is once rotated against the urging force of the lock spring 55. Further, when the drive body 34 is rotated to the first rotation end, the sliding inclined edge 36d gets over the lock portion 53b, and the lock member 43 is rotated by the urging force of the lock spring 55 to lock the locked portion 36c. Engaged with the portion 53b, the drive body 34 is restricted from rotating against the urging force of the traveling spring 40, is locked, and is held at the first rotating end to return to the initial state.
  • the image pickup apparatus 1 has a so-called electronic front curtain shutter configuration by combining an electronic curtain that functions as a front curtain and an opening / closing blade 15 that is provided as a mechanical structure and functions as a rear curtain.
  • Some imaging devices use an electronic shutter that electronically performs both the front curtain and the rear curtain.
  • the front curtain is performed by clearing (resetting) the electric charge
  • the rear curtain is performed by continuous reading. ..
  • some imaging devices use a shutter that mechanically performs both the front curtain and the rear curtain. In this case, both the drive mechanism of the front curtain and the drive mechanism of the rear curtain are required. , There is a risk that the size of the image pickup device will increase and the number of parts will increase.
  • the electronic front curtain shutter by configuring the electronic front curtain shutter by combining the electronic curtain and the opening / closing blade 15 like the image pickup device 1, the large size of the image pickup device 1 and the increase in the number of parts are suppressed, and the rolling shutter distortion is generated. It becomes possible to suppress.
  • the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is lower than the case where the opening / closing blade 15 is operated by both the driving force of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the driving force of the traveling spring 40, but the coil 31 is energized. Power consumption can be reduced as much as it is not performed.
  • a magnetic drive unit having a magnet 32 that is rotated by energizing the coil 31 and a rotor gear 33 that is rotated by the rotation of the magnet 32. 27, a drive body 34 having a drive gear 35 meshed with the rotor gear 33, and a traveling spring 40 for applying an urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34. 15 is operated in the opening / closing direction as the drive body 34 rotates.
  • the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 can be performed by the driving force of the magnetic driving unit 27 generated by energizing the coil 31 and the urging force of the traveling spring 40 in the driving body 34, and the magnetic driving unit 27 can be opened / closed.
  • the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 can be performed by reducing the driving force generated in the above, and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 can be increased without increasing the size of the magnetic drive unit 27 and increasing the power consumption. it can.
  • the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are arranged side by side in the same direction as the opening / closing direction of the opening / closing blade 15, that is, in the direction orthogonal to the optical axis direction.
  • the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are arranged so as not to line up in the traveling direction of the light passing through the opening 13a, it is possible to reduce the size of the image pickup device 1 and the blade opening / closing device 11 in the traveling direction of the light. ..
  • the drive body 34 is provided with a supported shaft portion 37 that functions as a rotation fulcrum portion, a torsion coil spring is used as the traveling spring 40, and the traveling spring 40 is supported by the supported shaft portion 37.
  • the drive body 34 can be miniaturized and the magnetic drive unit 27 can be miniaturized. Energy efficiency can be improved.
  • a locking member 43 having a locking portion 53b and operating between a locked position and a non-locking position is provided, a locked portion 36c is formed on the drive body 34, and the urging force of the traveling spring 40 at the locked position The drive body 34 is locked to the lock member 43 by pressing the locked portion 36c against the lock portion 53b.
  • the locked portion 36c is pressed against the lock portion 53b by the urging force of the traveling spring 40, so that the initial position of the drive body 34 before the start of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 is determined, so that the initial position of the driving body 34 is stable. Therefore, stable opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 can be ensured.
  • the initial positions of the magnet 32 and the drive body 34 are such that the locked portion 36c of the drive body 34 is pressed against the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43 by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. Is defined by.
  • the locked portion 36c of the drive body 34 is pressed against the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43 by the urging force of the traveling spring 40 to determine the initial positions of the magnet 32 and the drive body 34. Therefore, the magnetizing direction of the magnet 32 and the shape of the first yoke 29 do not affect the initial positions of the magnet 32 and the drive body 34. As a result, high positional accuracy regarding the initial positions of the magnet 32 and the drive body 34 can be ensured, and stable performance of the drive mechanism 17 regarding the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 can be ensured.
  • unlocking body 42 which is operated between the lock holding position and the unlocking position and operates the lock member 43 between the locked position and the unlocked position, and the unlocking body 42 are held at the lock holding position by being attracted to each other.
  • An electromagnet 56 and an unlocking spring 51 that urges the unlocking body 42 toward the unlocking position are provided.
  • the unlocking body 42 is held in the lock holding position by the electromagnet 56, and the unlocking body 42 is locked from the lock holding position by the urging force of the unlocking spring 51 by releasing the action of the electromagnet 56 on the unlocking body 42. It becomes possible to operate toward the release position, and the operation between the lock holding position and the unlock position of the unlock body 42 can be reliably performed by a simple mechanism.
  • a brake lever 59 is provided to reduce the rotation speed of the drive body 34 as it approaches the rotation end in a predetermined rotation range of the drive body 34.
  • the brake lever 59 is made rotatable, and the brake lever 59 is provided with a brake arm 60 pressed by the drive body 34 and an action arm 61 for pressing the unlocked body 42, and the brake arm 60 by the drive body 34 is provided.
  • the lock release body 42 is pressed by the action arm 61, the unlock body 42 is operated from the unlock position to the lock holding position, and the lock member 43 is operated from the unlock position to the lock position. Will be done.
  • the brake lever 59 decelerates the drive body 34 and operates the unlocked body 42 from the unlocked position to the lock holding position. Therefore, the brake lever 59 decelerates the drive body 34 and operates the unlocked body 42. It is not necessary to provide a separate mechanism for each, and the structure can be simplified and the operation can be speeded up.
  • a brake lever 59 that reduces the rotation speed of the drive body 34 when the image pickup device 1 and the blade opening / closing device 11 are rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, and a brake lever 59.
  • the lock member 43 includes a lock member 43 that locks the drive body 34 at the lock position, and an unlock spring 51 that operates the lock member 43 from the lock position to the unlocked position when the drive body 34 is unlocked. By applying the rotational force of the brake lever 59 to the 43, the lock member 43 is operated from the unlocked position to the locked position.
  • the rotation of the drive body 34 is performed not only by the force applied by the brake lever 59 but also by the force applied by the lock member 43, the deceleration effect of the drive body 34 is large and the deceleration of the drive body 34 is efficient. And it can be done quickly.
  • a magnetic drive unit 27 having a coil 31 to which a drive current is supplied and a magnet 32 that is rotated by energizing the coil 31 is provided, and is driven by at least one of the drive body 34 or the magnetic drive unit 27.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 is operated.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 is operated in the opening / closing direction by the driving force of at least one of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the driving body 34, the degree of freedom regarding the operation control of the opening / closing blade 15 is improved, and the speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is photographed. It can be easily changed according to the above.
  • the magnetic drive unit 27 is provided with a rotor gear 33 that is rotated with the rotation of the magnet 32, and the drive body 34 is provided with a drive gear 35 that is meshed with the rotor gear 33, via the drive body 34.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 is provided with a traveling spring 40 that applies an urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 can be operated in one direction in the opening / closing direction by the driving force generated by the rotation of the magnet 32 in the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is possible to increase the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 without increasing the size and power consumption of the magnet.
  • the locking operation unit 41A has an unlocking body 42A and a locking member 43 (see FIGS. 19 and 20).
  • the unlocking body 42A has an unlocking base 44A and a suction piece 45, and the unlocking base 44A is composed of a holding lever 71 and an unlocking arm 72.
  • the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are respectively rotatable separately between the lock holding position and the unlocking position with the coaxial as a fulcrum.
  • the holding lever 71 has a plate-shaped base surface portion 73 that faces substantially in the vertical direction and a first support surface portion 74 that is bent upward with respect to the base surface portion 73. A part of the first support surface portion 74 is provided as a first spring receiving portion 74a protruding laterally from the base surface portion 73.
  • a substantially cylindrical first spring support member 75 is attached to the first spring receiving portion 74a.
  • a return spring 76 is supported by the first spring support member 75 on the front side of the first spring receiving portion 74a. One end of the return spring 76 is engaged with the first support surface portion 74.
  • the suction piece 45 is fixed to the base surface portion 73 and is located on the upper surface side of one end portion in the left-right direction of the base surface portion 73.
  • the release arm 72 is bent rearward with respect to the second support surface portion 77 and the second support surface portion 77 facing in the front-rear direction toward the second support surface portion 77 with respect to the spring hooking surface portion 78 and the spring hooking surface portion 78. It has a pressed holding surface portion 79.
  • the second support surface portion 77 is positioned so as to face the first support surface portion 74 of the holding lever 71 in the front-rear direction, and the second support surface portion 77 is located in front of the first support surface portion 74.
  • a part of the second support surface portion 77 is provided as a second spring receiving portion 77a located so as to face the first spring receiving portion 74a of the holding lever 71 in the front-rear direction.
  • the other part of the second support surface portion 77 is projected in the direction opposite to the second spring receiving portion 77a on the side of the base surface portion 73, and this protruding portion is provided as the release receiving portion 77b.
  • the second support surface portion 77 is provided with a regulating protrusion 77c protruding downward.
  • both ends of the return spring 76 are engaged with the first support surface portion 74 and the spring hooking surface portion 78, respectively, and the return spring 76 brings the base surface portion 73 and the pressing surface portion 79 closer to the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72. Is given the urging power of. As a result, the pressing surface portion 79 is abutted against the base surface portion 73 in a state in which the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are not subjected to a force in a direction opposite to the urging force of the return spring 76.
  • a substantially cylindrical second spring support member 80 is attached to the second spring receiving portion 77a.
  • the second spring support member 80 and the first spring support member 75 are coupled between the first spring receiving portion 74a and the second spring receiving portion 77a.
  • the unlocking spring 81 is supported on the rear side of the second spring receiving portion 77a on the second spring supporting member 80.
  • the unlocking spring 81 is, for example, a torsion coil spring, one end of which is engaged with a spring support shaft 21 attached to the arrangement base 20, and the other end of which is engaged with a second support surface portion 77.
  • the spring force of the unlock spring 81 is larger than the spring force of the return spring 76.
  • the lock member 43 is orthogonal to the supported plate portion 53 and the supported plate portion 53 located on the front side of the release arm 72 facing the second support surface portion 77, and the base surface portion 73 is located on the lower side of the release arm 72. It has a pressed plate portion 54 positioned so as to face the front end portion.
  • a substantially cylindrical third spring support member 82 is attached to the supported plate portion 53 of the lock member 43.
  • the lock spring 55 is supported on the front side of the second spring receiving portion 77a by the third spring supporting member 82.
  • the spring force of the lock spring 55 is smaller than the spring force of the unlock spring 81.
  • One end of the lock spring 55 is engaged with the spring support shaft 21 attached to the arrangement base 20, and the other end is engaged with the supported plate portion 53 of the lock member 43.
  • the lock shaft 24 attached to the arrangement base 20 is inserted into the shaft insertion hole 53a of the lock member 43, the first spring support member 75, the second spring support member 80, and the third spring support member 82.
  • the holding lever 71, the release arm 72, and the lock member 43 can be rotated separately with the lock shaft 24 as a fulcrum.
  • the release arm 72 is urged by the lock release spring 81 in a direction in which the pressing surface portion 79 contacts the base surface portion 73 of the holding lever 71, and the holding lever 72.
  • the 71 is urged in the same direction as the release arm 72 by applying the urging force of the unlock spring 81 via the release arm 72. Therefore, the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are integrally rotatable in the direction in which the urging force of the lock release spring 81 is applied.
  • the holding lever 71 is urged by the return spring 76 in the direction in which the base surface portion 73 approaches the holding surface portion 79 of the release arm 72, and the urging direction of the holding lever 71 by the return spring 76 is the lock release spring 81 with respect to the holding lever 71. It is in the opposite direction to the urging direction.
  • the lock member 43 is urged by the lock spring 55 in a direction in which the pressed plate portion 54 approaches the base surface portion 73. Therefore, the urging directions of the lock release spring 81 and the lock spring 55 are opposite to each other in the rotation direction of the lock operation unit 41A, and a force other than the urging force is applied to the lock release body 42A and the lock member 43 in the rotation direction.
  • the unlocking body 42A and the locking member 43 are held in a state where the pressed plate portion 54 of the locking member 43 is pressed against the regulating protrusion 77c of the unlocking body 42A.
  • the coil 31 is not energized, the magnetic drive unit 27 is not generating a driving force, and the rotation of the magnet 32 is stopped. Has been made.
  • the electromagnet 56 is not energized, and a magnetic force is generated in the magnetic force generating portion 57. Therefore, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the magnetic force generating portion 57, and the suction piece 45 is attracted by the suction portions 57a and 57a. Therefore, both the holding lever 71 and the releasing arm 72 of the unlocking body 42A are held at the locking holding position.
  • the lock member 43 is given an urging force in the direction in which the pressed portion plate 54 approaches the base surface portion 73 by the lock spring 55, and the pressed plate portion 54 is pressed against the regulation protrusion 77c of the release arm 72.
  • the lock member 43 is held in the locked position.
  • the image sensor 12 is in a closed state (non-exposure state) in which light is not incident by the electronic curtain (front curtain).
  • the brake lever 59 In the initial state, the brake lever 59 is held at the deceleration start position, the brake arm 60 is separated from the drive lever 36 of the drive body 34, and the pressing shaft 62 attached to the action arm 61 is the second release arm 72. It is separated from the release receiving portion 77b of the support surface portion 77.
  • the electromagnet 56 When the electromagnet 56 is energized, the operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the open position to the closed position is started.
  • the electronic curtain is controlled according to the operating speed of the opening / closing blade 15 in a state where a slit is formed between the electronic curtain and the opening / closing blade 15. Light is incident on the image pickup device 12 through the formed slit to perform exposure.
  • the electromagnet 56 When the electromagnet 56 is energized, the magnetic force generated in the magnetic force generating unit 57 disappears, and the suction pieces 45 are released from being attracted by the suction parts 57a and 57a. Therefore, the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are integrally rotated by the urging force of the lock release spring 81 from the lock holding position to the lock release position.
  • the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 that have been rotated toward the unlocked position rotate in contact with a rotation restricting portion (not shown) that is partially attached to the arrangement base 20 or formed on the arrangement base 20. Is stopped and held in the unlocked position.
  • the lock member 43 that has been rotated integrally with the unlocked body 42A toward the unlocked position is stopped rotating along with the unlocked body 42A and is held in the unlocked position.
  • the drive body 34 is rotated from the first rotation end to the second rotation by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated toward the moving end, and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40 is transmitted to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34, and the opening / closing blade 15 is closed from the open position as the driving body 34 rotates. It is operated toward the position.
  • the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 is energized at the same time as the electromagnet 56 is energized, and the magnet 32 functioning as a rotor and the rotor gear 33 are integrally rotated in the direction opposite to the drive body 34, and the magnetic drive unit is energized.
  • the driving force generated in 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34. Therefore, the opening / closing blade 15 is operated by both the driving force generated by the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40, and is operated at high speed from the open position to the closed position. ..
  • the coil 31 is energized, and the opening / closing blade 15 is further operated toward the closed position (see FIG. 23).
  • the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are continuously rotated in opposite directions in synchronization with each other, and the drive body 34 is further rotated toward the second rotation end by the urging force of the traveling spring 40.
  • the drive body 34 further rotated toward the second rotation end is brought into contact with the brake arm 60 of the brake lever 59 whose connecting shaft 38 attached to the drive lever 36 is held at the deceleration start position, and the brake lever 59 is pressed against the connecting shaft 38 and is rotated from the deceleration start position to the rotation stop position against the frictional force. Therefore, the rotation speed of the drive body 34 is gradually reduced by the brake lever 59 as it approaches the second rotation end, and the operating speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is also gradually reduced as it approaches the closed position.
  • the pressing shaft 62 is brought into contact with the release receiving portion 77b of the release arm 72 by the rotation of the brake lever 59.
  • the energization of the electromagnet 56 is stopped. Therefore, the magnetic force is generated again in the magnetic force generating unit 57.
  • the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are synchronously rotated in opposite directions, the brake lever 59 is pressed by the connecting shaft 38 and continuously rotated, and the brake arm 60 is attached to the stopper 26 attached to the arrangement base 20. The rotation of the brake lever 59 is stopped in contact with the brake lever 59 (see FIG. 24).
  • the brake lever 59 is held in the rotation stop position by coming into contact with the stopper 26, and the rotation of the drive body 34, the magnet 32, and the rotor gear 33 is stopped when the rotation of the brake lever 59 is stopped, and the drive body 34 is moved. It is held at the second rotating end. At this time, the energization of the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 is stopped.
  • the release receiving portion 77b of the release arm 72 is pressed by the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59, and the release arm 72 is opposed to the urging force of the lock release spring 81. It is rotated from the unlocked position to the locked holding position.
  • the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are individually rotatable about the coaxial as a fulcrum, the release arm 72 is pressed when the release receiving portion 77b of the release arm 72 is pressed by the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59. Although it is rotated to the lock holding position, the holding lever 71 is not rotated with the release arm 72.
  • the spring force of the return spring 76 is smaller than the spring force of the lock release spring 81, and the lock member 43 is slower than the rotation speed of the release arm 72 which is pressed and rotated by the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59. Is rotated to the lock holding position.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 operated by the rotation of the driving body 34 reaches the closing position and from the opening position to the closing position of the opening / closing blade 15. Is completed, and the opening 13a of the base body 13 is closed.
  • the energization of the electromagnet 56 is stopped and a magnetic force is generated in the magnetic force generating portion 57. Therefore, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the magnetic force generating unit 57, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the suction parts 57a and 57a, the unlocking body 42A is rotated to the lock holding position, and the lock member 43 returns to the initial state and the lock member 43 is in the lock position. It is rotated to return to the initial state.
  • the operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the closed position to the open position is started by energizing the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the opposite direction to the previous one (see FIG. 26).
  • the driving force generated in the magnetic driving unit 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the driving body 34, and the driving body 34 is subjected to the second force against the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated from the rotating end to the first rotating end to return to the initial state, and the driving force generated in the magnetic drive unit 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34, and the opening / closing blade 15 Is operated from the closed position to the open position.
  • the connecting shaft 38 of the drive body 34 is separated from the brake arm 60, but the return shaft 39 of the drive body 34 brakes.
  • the arm 60 is contacted from the direction opposite to the contact direction of the connecting shaft 38, and the brake lever 59 is rotated from the rotation stop position to the deceleration start position by the return shaft 39 to return to the initial state.
  • the brake lever 59 is rotated from the rotation stop position to the deceleration start position, so that the pressing shaft 62 is separated from the release receiving portion 77b of the release arm 72.
  • the lock member 43 When the drive body 34 is rotated from the second rotating end to the first rotating end, the lock member 43 is rotated from the unlocked position to the locked position, and the sliding inclined edge 36d of the drive lever 36d. Is slid on the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43, and the lock member 43 is once rotated against the urging force of the lock spring 55. Further, when the drive body 34 is rotated to the first rotation end, the sliding inclined edge 36d gets over the lock portion 53b, and the lock member 43 is rotated by the urging force of the lock spring 55 to lock the locked portion 36c. Engaged with the portion 53b, the drive body 34 is restricted from rotating against the urging force of the traveling spring 40, is locked, and is held at the first rotating end to return to the initial state.
  • the unlocking body 42A is pressed by the holding lever 71 and the brake lever 59 that are attracted to the electromagnet 56. 72, and the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are individually rotatable.
  • the rotation speed of the holding lever 71 can be set to a speed different from the rotation speed of the release arm 72 pressed by the brake lever 59, and the rotation speed of the holding lever 71 at the time of attraction by the electromagnet 56 can be released.
  • the rotation speed slower than the rotation speed of the arm 72 the impact applied to the electromagnet 56 when the unlocking body 42A is attracted by the electromagnet 56 can be reduced, and the high performance of the electromagnet 56 can be maintained.
  • the suction portions 57a and 57a are often formed of a material having low hardness, and by reducing the impact applied to the electromagnet 56 by the unlocking body 42A, the suction portions 57a and 57a are worn. It is possible to secure good characteristics by improving the durability of the electromagnet 56.
  • the release arm 72 is urged by the unlock spring 81, and a return spring 76 is provided to urge the holding lever 71 in a direction approaching the release arm 72, and the urging force of the return spring 76 is the urging force of the unlock spring 81. It has been made smaller.
  • the holding lever 71 is rotated in the direction of approaching the releasing arm 72 by the return spring 76 having an urging force smaller than the urging force of the unlocking spring 81.
  • the rotation speed can be made slower than the rotation speed of the release arm 72, and the impact of the unlocking body 42A on the electromagnet 56 can be reliably reduced by a simple configuration.
  • FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an example of an electrical internal configuration of the image pickup apparatus 1.
  • the image sensor 1 includes an optical block 90, an image sensor 12, a camera signal processing unit 91, an image processing unit 92, a display unit 93, a recording control unit 94, a control unit 95, a driver unit 96, and an operation unit 97.
  • the battery 98 which is the operating power source of the image pickup device 1
  • the battery 98 may be detachable from the image pickup device 1.
  • the battery 98 is used as an operating power source for each necessary part of the image pickup apparatus 1.
  • the optical block 90 includes an optical system 10 including a lens such as a cover lens, a zoom lens, and a focus lens, an aperture mechanism, and the like, and a blade opening / closing device (blade opening / closing unit) 11.
  • a lens such as a cover lens, a zoom lens, and a focus lens, an aperture mechanism, and the like
  • a blade opening / closing device blade opening / closing unit 11.
  • Light from the subject is guided by the optical system 10, and the incident light is focused on the image pickup surface of the image pickup device 12 through the opening 13a of the blade opening / closing device 11.
  • the blade opening / closing device 11 is provided with an electromagnet 56 and a magnetic drive unit (motor) 27.
  • the electromagnet 56 functions as an electronic device for controlling the lock / unlock of the drive body 34, and when the electromagnet 56 is energized, the locked state of the drive body 34 is changed. After being released, the driving body 34 is rotated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40, and the traveling operation of the
  • the image sensor 12 photoelectrically converts the light incident through the optical block 90 to obtain an electric signal according to the amount of received light.
  • a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) sensor, a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) sensor, or the like is used for the image sensor 12.
  • the image sensor 12 executes, for example, CDS (Correlated Double Sampling) processing, AGC (Automatic Gain Control) processing, or the like on the electric signal obtained by photoelectric conversion, and further performs A / D (Analog / Digital) conversion processing. Then, the captured image signal as digital data is output to the camera signal processing unit 91 in the subsequent stage.
  • the camera signal processing unit 91 is configured as an image processing processor by, for example, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) or the like.
  • the camera signal processing unit 91 performs various signal processing on the digital signal (captured image signal) from the image sensor 12. For example, various signal processing such as noise removal, image quality correction, and conversion to a luminance / color difference signal is performed.
  • the image processing unit 92 performs compression coding / decompression decoding processing of an image signal based on a predetermined image data format, conversion processing of data specifications such as resolution, and the like.
  • the recording control unit 94 performs recording / reproduction on a recording medium using, for example, a non-volatile memory.
  • the recording control unit 94 performs a process of recording an image file such as moving image data or still image data, a thumbnail image, or the like on a recording medium, for example.
  • the actual form of the recording control unit 94 can be considered in various ways.
  • the recording control unit 94 may be configured as a flash memory built in the image pickup device 1 and a write / read circuit thereof, or a recording medium that can be attached to and detached from the image pickup device 1, such as a memory card (portable flash memory, etc.). ) May be in the form of a card recording / playback unit that performs recording / playback access.
  • a form built in the image pickup apparatus 1 it may be realized as an SSD (Solid State Drive), an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), or the like.
  • the display unit 93 displays various information to the user, and is realized by, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal panel (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display as the display 7 described above.
  • the display unit 93 displays various information on the display screen based on the instruction of the control unit 95.
  • the display unit 93 displays a reproduced image of the image data read from the recording medium by the recording control unit 94.
  • the display unit 93 is supplied with image data of an captured image whose resolution has been converted for display by, for example, the image processing unit 92, and the display unit 93 is based on the image data of the captured image in response to an instruction from the control unit 95. May be displayed.
  • a so-called through image which is an captured image during composition confirmation
  • the display unit 93 displays various operation menus, icons, messages, etc., that is, as a GUI (Graphical User Interface) on the screen based on the instruction of the control unit 95.
  • GUI Graphic User Interface
  • the operation unit 97 collectively shows input devices for the user to perform various operation inputs.
  • the operation unit 97 includes various controls such as a shutter button 4, a zoom switch 5, a power button 6, and an operation unit 8 provided in the housing of the image pickup device 1, a dial, a touch panel, a touch pad, and the like. Various controls are shown.
  • the operation unit 97 detects the user's operation, and a signal corresponding to the input operation is sent to the control unit 95.
  • the driver unit 96 comprehensively represents a driver for driving various electronic devices such as actuators provided in the optical block 90.
  • the driver unit 96 is provided with a motor driver for the zoom lens drive motor in the optical system 10, a motor driver for the focus lens drive motor, a motor driver for the motor of the aperture mechanism, and the like. Further, particularly in the case of the present embodiment, the driver unit 96 is provided with a shutter motor driver unit 99 for driving the magnetic drive unit 27 as a shutter motor and a spring driver unit 100 for driving the electromagnet 56. ..
  • Each driver in the driver unit 96 drives a target electronic device in response to an instruction from the control unit 95.
  • the control unit 95 includes, for example, a microcomputer (arithmetic processing device) equipped with a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory), a RAM (Random Access Memory), and the like, and is a program stored in the ROM. By executing the above, the entire image pickup apparatus 1 is controlled. For example, the control unit 95 controls the shutter speed (exposure time) of the image sensor 12, instructs the camera signal processing unit 91 to process various signals, performs an imaging operation and a recording operation according to a user's operation, and reproduces a recorded image file. It controls the recording control unit 94 for operation. Further, the control unit 95 controls the operation of each necessary unit regarding the operation of the zoom lens, focus lens, aperture mechanism, etc., user interface operation, etc. in the optical system 10.
  • a microcomputer central processing Unit
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • control unit 95 in the present embodiment gives an instruction to the shutter motor driver unit 99 to control the operation of the magnetic drive unit 27, and also gives an instruction to the spring driver unit 100 to control the operation of the electromagnet 56.
  • control unit 95 controls the charge reset timing of the image sensor 12 (travel control of the electronic front curtain) and the opening / closing blade 15 (rear curtain) by controlling the operation of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the electromagnet 56. Run control.
  • control unit 95 in the present embodiment can set each of the following items based on the user's operation.
  • -Running speed of opening / closing blade 15 "curtain speed” -Continuous shooting speed (number of acquisitions of captured image data as a still image per unit time: for example, frame / sec): "frame speed” -Flash (strobe) 3 ON / OFF (flash / non-flash) ⁇ Strobe synchronization speed ⁇ Silent mode ON / OFF
  • the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is hereinafter referred to as “curtain speed” from the viewpoint of the traveling speed of the rear curtain.
  • the continuous shooting speed is hereinafter referred to as "frame speed”.
  • the control unit 95 sets the optimum value (parameter).
  • the silent mode is a mode related to the sound generated by the traveling of the opening / closing blade 15 in the blade opening / closing device 11. When the silent mode is ON, the opening / closing blade 15 with improved quietness is started to run.
  • FIG. 28 shows a circuit configuration example of the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27 in this embodiment.
  • the output voltage of the battery 98 is supplied to the shutter motor driver unit 99.
  • the shutter motor driver unit 99 includes a DC / DC converter 101, a capacitor 102, and a driver IC (Integrated Circuit) 103.
  • the DC / DC converter 101 is configured as a step-up switching regulator, boosts the output voltage from the battery 98, and outputs the voltage.
  • the capacitor 102 is charged by receiving the output voltage of the DC / DC converter 101, and the voltage between both terminals of the capacitor 102 is supplied as the power supply voltage of the driver IC 103.
  • the driver IC 103 is configured to include, for example, an H-bridge circuit consisting of four transistors, and supplies a drive current corresponding to the power supply voltage supplied from the capacitor 102 to the magnetic drive unit 27. At this time, the driver IC 103 supplies the drive current to the magnetic drive unit 27 based on the instruction from the control unit 95. Further, the driver IC 103 causes a drive current in the direction (polarity) instructed by the control unit 95 to flow through the coil 31 (not shown in FIG. 28) of the magnetic drive unit 27 by the above H-bridge circuit.
  • the imaging device 1 of the present embodiment is a hybrid in which both the magnetic drive unit 27 and the traveling spring 40 transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade 15 as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade 15 in the blade opening / closing device 11. It has a traveling mode and a spring traveling mode in which only the traveling spring 40 of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the traveling spring 40 transmits traveling power to the opening / closing blade 15.
  • the control unit 95 switches the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade 15 between the hybrid traveling mode and the spring traveling mode.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining the operation for each traveling mode
  • FIG. 29A is an operation explanatory diagram in the hybrid traveling mode
  • FIG. 29B is an operation explanatory diagram in the spring traveling mode.
  • the capacitor 102 is discharged when the opening / closing blade 15 starts traveling.
  • the traveling of the opening / closing blade 15 is completed (that is, the closing position is reached as described above)
  • the driving of the magnetic driving unit 27 is stopped, the discharging of the capacitor 102 is stopped, and the charging of the capacitor 102 is started.
  • This charging is performed to store the electric power required for winding up the traveling spring 40 (in this example, the opening / closing blade 15 is also returned to the open position).
  • the driving of the magnetic driving unit 27 for winding up the traveling spring 40 is started, so that the capacitor 102 is discharged again.
  • the capacitor 102 is charged again. This recharging is performed so that the magnetic drive unit 27 stores electric power for moving the opening / closing blade 15 from the open position to the closed position at the next release. When this recharging is completed, the next release can be started.
  • the opening / closing blade 15 travels to the closed position by the power of the traveling spring 40, and the magnetic drive unit 27 is not used. Therefore, the capacitor 102 is not discharged even when the opening / closing blade 15 starts running. In this case, the capacitor 102 is discharged when the traveling spring 40 is wound up after the traveling to the closed position of the opening / closing blade 15 is completed. Then, when the winding of the traveling spring 40 is completed, charging of the capacitor 102 is started, and when the charging is completed, the next release can be started.
  • the curtain speed can be increased.
  • the number of times the capacitor 102 is charged per release that is, per frame of the captured image
  • the charging time is reduced as compared with the hybrid driving mode, so that the next release can be started. It is possible to reduce the waiting time until it becomes possible and to increase the frame speed (see the arrow "X" in FIG. 29B).
  • one imaging device having a contradictory relationship of imaging with an increased curtain speed and imaging with an increased frame speed is performed. It can be realized by the image pickup device of.
  • the hybrid traveling mode not only the power of the traveling spring 40 but also the power of the magnetic drive unit 27 is used.
  • the hybrid driving mode and the spring driving mode can also be defined as follows. That is, the hybrid travel mode is a travel mode in which the power consumption of the magnetic drive unit 27 is high, and the spring travel mode is a travel mode in which the power consumption of the magnetic drive unit 27 is low. Briefly, the hybrid traveling mode and the spring traveling mode are traveling modes in which the power consumption of the magnetic drive unit 27 is different.
  • the curtain speed can be increased.
  • the hybrid traveling mode can be defined as a traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is high
  • the spring traveling mode can be defined as a traveling mode in which the traveling speed is slow (that is, the hybrid traveling mode and the spring).
  • the traveling mode is a traveling mode in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades 15 are different).
  • the spring traveling mode is a traveling mode in which only the traveling spring 40 transmits the traveling power to the opening / closing blade 15, but in the spring traveling mode, the magnetic drive unit 27 slightly reduces the power of the traveling spring 40. It may also include the case of assisting.
  • the hybrid driving mode and the spring driving mode can also be defined as follows. That is, the hybrid traveling mode is a mode in which both the magnetic drive unit 27 and the traveling spring 40 transmit the traveling power of the opening / closing blade 15, and the spring traveling mode is a mode in which the traveling spring transmits the traveling power. It is defined that the power consumption of the drive unit 27 is lower than that of the hybrid driving mode.
  • the magnetic drive unit 27 slightly assists in the spring travel mode, it is conceivable that the magnetic drive unit 27 assists the traveling spring 40 so as to absorb changes in torque with time and individual differences.
  • step ST1 the control unit 95 waits until the setting of the strobe tuning speed is changed. Specifically, in this example, the process waits until the strobe tuning speed setting value is changed based on the user's operation.
  • the control unit 95 determines in step ST2 whether or not the strobe is ON, that is, whether or not a value indicating ON is set as the ON / OFF setting value of the flash 3. If the strobe is not ON, the control unit 95 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. That is, if the strobe is OFF, it is not necessary to execute the processes after step ST3 described later, so the control unit 95 finishes the process shown in FIG.
  • step ST3 determines whether or not the set value of the strobe tuning speed exceeds the threshold value THs.
  • the threshold value THs a value equal to or lower than the maximum shutter speed that can be realized in the spring running mode is set. If the set value of the strobe tuning speed does not exceed the threshold value THs, the control unit 95 proceeds to step ST4 to select the spring traveling mode, and ends the series of processes shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the set value of the strobe tuning speed exceeds the threshold value THs, the control unit 95 proceeds to step ST5 to select the hybrid traveling mode, and ends the series of processes shown in FIG.
  • the running mode is switched to the running mode which is advantageous for the frame speed as the spring running mode, and when the frame speed is set to the above-mentioned "AUTO". Is capable of setting the fastest frame speed according to the set value of the strobe tuning speed.
  • the driving mode is switched to a driving mode that is advantageous to the curtain speed as the hybrid driving mode, and imaging with a high strobe synchronization speed that cannot be realized in the spring driving mode is realized. It is possible to do.
  • the imaging with a high strobe synchronization speed and the imaging with a high continuous shooting speed can be compatible with each other with one imaging device.
  • Control example II relates to arbitration of three types of parameters: curtain speed, frame speed, and shutter speed.
  • Control Example II Hi (High) / Low are defined as shown in FIG. 31 for the shutter speed, the curtain speed, and the frame speed, respectively.
  • the shutter speed Hi / Low is divided by a predetermined threshold value.
  • the threshold value is the maximum strobe tuning speed.
  • the shutter speed may be abbreviated as "SS".
  • the curtain speed and the frame speed of Hi / Low are classified according to whether or not the shutter drive can be realized by spring drive (that is, spring drive mode) or hybrid drive (hybrid drive mode).
  • spring drive that is, spring drive mode
  • hybrid drive hybrid drive
  • the range that can be realized by spring drive is Low
  • the range that can be realized by hybrid drive is Hi
  • the range that can be realized by spring drive is Hi.
  • two values, Hi and Low can be set as parameters.
  • the frame speed it is possible to set a multi-step value such as 1 frame / second to 8 frames / second as a parameter, and Hi / Low is classified from the set value.
  • FIG. 32 shows a combination of settings for each function of shutter speed (SS), frame speed, and curtain speed.
  • SS shutter speed
  • FIG. 32 shows a combination of settings for each function of shutter speed (SS), frame speed, and curtain speed.
  • eight combinations (1) to (8) in the figure can be considered, the shutter speeds of (1) to (4) are all Hi, and the shutter speeds of (5) to (8) are all Low. It is a combination. It is not necessary to consider the combination of (1) and (5) in which both the frame speed and the curtain speed are Hi. Therefore, in arbitrating the parameters of shutter speed, frame speed, and curtain speed, the combination of (2) to (4) and (6) to (8) may be considered.
  • the control unit 95 is in a state in which the current state should give priority to the curtain speed or a state in which the frame speed should be prioritized, depending on the settings of the shutter speed, the frame speed, and the curtain speed Hi / Low.
  • Mode recognition is performed to manage the status. That is, the curtain speed priority mode / frame speed priority mode is recognized. Specifically, the control unit 95 recognizes the curtain speed priority mode and the frame speed priority mode as follows.
  • control unit 95 recognizes the curtain speed priority mode and the frame speed priority mode when any of the curtain speed, frame speed, and shutter speed settings is changed by the user's operation. Then, the control unit 95 arbitrates each parameter of the curtain speed, the frame speed, and the shutter speed based on the recognition result. In this example, in the arbitration, the strobe ON / OFF and the "AUTO" setting are also taken into consideration.
  • step S101 the control unit 95 waits until any of the SS, curtain speed, and frame speed settings is changed in step S101, and when any of these settings is changed, the strobe is turned on in step S102. Judge whether or not. When the strobe is not ON, the control unit 95 executes the process shown in FIG. 34, and when the strobe is ON, executes the process shown in FIG. 35.
  • step S103 the control unit 95 determines whether the curtain speed priority mode or the frame speed priority mode is used. That is, it is determined whether the curtain speed priority mode or the frame speed priority mode is recognized according to the setting change detected in step S101.
  • the case where the curtain speed priority mode is determined is the case where the curtain speed is changed to Hi, the frame speed is set to Low, and the SS is set to Low, and the frame speed is prioritized.
  • the case where the mode is determined is the case where the curtain speed is set to Low, the frame speed is set to Hi, and the SS is set to Low.
  • step S104 determines in step S104 whether or not the curtain speed is Hi. If the curtain speed is Hi, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S106 and determines whether or not the frame speed setting is "AUTO". If the frame speed setting is "AUTO”, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S107 to set the frame speed to the maximum speed setting of Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame speed setting is not "AUTO", the control unit 95 proceeds to step S108 to make the frame speed selectable within the range of Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
  • step S104 determines whether the curtain speed is not Hi. If it is determined in step S104 that the curtain speed is not Hi, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S105 to determine whether SS is Hi or not. If the SS is Hi, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S106 described above. That is, if the frame speed setting is "AUTO", the frame speed is set to the maximum speed of Low, and if it is not "AUTO", the frame speed can be set within the range of Low.
  • step S105 the control unit 95 proceeds to step S109, sets the frame speed to Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
  • the case where the SS is determined not to be Hi in step S105 is the case where the setting change to set the frame speed to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore, in step S109, the frame speed is changed. Is set to Low.
  • step S103 when the frame speed priority mode is determined, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S110 to determine whether or not the frame speed is Hi, and if the frame speed is Hi, the curtain speed is Low in step S111.
  • the SS makes Hi and Low selectable, and finishes a series of processes following from FIG. 33.
  • the SS can be adjusted by the time difference between the electronic front curtain and the opening / closing blade 15's running start timing, and the SS can be Hi even if the curtain speed is Low. it can.
  • step S110 determines in step S110 whether or not the frame speed is not Hi. If the curtain speed setting is "AUTO", the control unit 95 proceeds to step S113 to set the curtain speed to Hi and SS to Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
  • the case where the curtain speed setting is determined to be "AUTO" in step S112 is the case where the setting change to set SS to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore, step S113 Then SS is set to Low.
  • step S112 when it is determined in step S112 that the curtain speed setting is not "AUTO”, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S114 to select Hi or Low for the curtain speed, and Hi or Low can be selected for SS, as shown in FIG. 33.
  • the following series of processing is completed.
  • the case where the curtain speed setting is determined not to be "AUTO" in step S112 is the case where the setting change to set the curtain speed to Low or SS to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore.
  • step S114 Hi and Low can be selected for the curtain speed and SS. At this time, if the setting change is a setting change in which the curtain speed is Low, the curtain speed is set to Low, and if the setting change is a setting change in which SS is Low, SS is set to Low. ..
  • steps S113 and S114 it is possible to include a process of determining whether or not the above-mentioned silent mode is ON, and setting the curtain speed to Low if the silent mode is ON.
  • the control unit 95 sets the strobe tuning speed in step S119. That is, since the strobe is ON and slit exposure is not possible, SS is set to the strobe synchronization speed.
  • step S120 the control unit 95 determines whether the curtain speed priority mode or the frame speed priority mode is used.
  • the control unit 95 proceeds to step S121 to determine whether or not the curtain speed is Hi, and if the curtain speed is Hi, in step S122, whether or not the frame speed setting is "AUTO". judge. If the frame speed setting is "AUTO”, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S123, sets the frame speed to the maximum speed setting of Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33. On the other hand, if the frame speed setting is not "AUTO", the control unit 95 makes it possible to select the frame speed within the range of Low in step S124, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
  • step S121 determines whether or not the curtain speed setting is "AUTO”, and if the frame speed setting is "AUTO", the step. Proceeding to S126, the frame speed is set to Hi, and a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33 is completed. On the other hand, if the frame speed setting is not "AUTO" in step S125, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S127 to enable the frame speed to be selected from Hi and Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
  • the case where the frame speed setting is determined not to be "AUTO” in step S125 is the case where the frame speed is changed to Hi or SS is changed to Hi as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore, in step S127, Hi and Low can be selected for the frame speed. If the setting change is a setting change in which the frame speed is Hi, the frame speed is set to Hi.
  • step S120 when the frame speed priority mode is determined, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S128 to determine whether or not the frame speed is Hi, and if the frame speed is Hi, the curtain speed is set in step S129. It is set to Low, and a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33 is completed.
  • step S1208 the control unit 95 proceeds to step S130 to determine whether or not the curtain speed setting is "AUTO”, and if the curtain speed setting is not "AUTO", the step The curtain speed is set to Hi in S131, and a series of processes following from FIG. 33 is completed.
  • step S130 The case where the curtain speed setting is determined to be "AUTO" in step S130 is the case where the setting change to set SS to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101 (that is, the curtain speed is set to Low). If the setting was not changed). In step S131, the curtain speed is set to "AUTO", so the curtain speed is set to Hi.
  • step S130 If the curtain speed setting is not "AUTO" in step S130, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S132 to enable the curtain speed to be selected from Hi and Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
  • the case where the curtain speed setting is determined not to be "AUTO” in step S130 is the case where the setting change to set the curtain speed to Low or SS to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore, in step S132, Hi and Low can be selected for the curtain speed. At this time, if the setting change is a setting change in which the curtain speed is Low, the curtain speed is set to Low.
  • steps S131 and S132 it is possible to include a process of determining whether or not the above-mentioned silent mode is ON, and setting the curtain speed to Low if the silent mode is ON.
  • the spring running mode is selected.
  • the hybrid traveling mode is selected.
  • the frame speed is determined to be Hi in steps S110 and S128, the spring travel mode is selected, and when the frame speed is set to Hi in step S126, for example, the spring travel mode is selected.
  • selecting the spring traveling mode according to the frame speed Hi in step S126 as described above can be paraphrased as follows. That is, when the curtain speed is not specified to be increased above the predetermined speed (S121: N) and the frame speed setting is AUTO (the frame speed is automatically selected) (S125: Y). ), The spring running mode is selected. Further, selecting the hybrid driving mode according to the curtain speed Hi in step S113 as described above does not specify that the frame speed is increased to a predetermined speed or higher (S110: N), and the curtain speed is not specified. When the setting for automatically selecting is set (S112: Y), it can be said that the hybrid driving mode is selected. By these processes, an appropriate driving mode selection is performed according to the user's intention.
  • the capacitor 102 is not provided, the charging waiting time of the capacitor 102 does not need to be considered. That is, the frame speed can be made the same in the hybrid traveling mode and the spring traveling mode. Even when the capacitor 102 is not provided, by switching between the hybrid driving mode and the traveling mode, it is possible to switch from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is fast to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low, and it is quiet. And the life of the blade opening / closing device can be extended.
  • FIG. 36 shows a circuit configuration example of the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the image pickup apparatus 1 as the first modification.
  • the control circuit 104 is provided in the shutter motor driver unit 99.
  • the control circuit 104 performs constant current control on the output current of the DC / DC converter 101 (that is, the charging current of the capacitor 102).
  • the DC / DC converter 101 is configured as a switching regulator, and the control circuit 104 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) the switching operation of the switching element that interrupts the input voltage in the DC / DC converter 101. Control is performed so as to control and adjust the ON duty (or OFF duty) of the switching element so that the output current value (current value) of the DC / DC converter 101 becomes constant at the target value It. Do.
  • the control unit 95 acquires a value (for example, SOC: charge rate) indicating the remaining amount (charge remaining amount) of the battery 98, and the target of constant current control by the control circuit 104 according to the acquired value.
  • the value It is set variably. Specifically, the higher the remaining amount of the battery 98, the higher the target value It (that is, the value of the charging current of the capacitor 102 becomes larger).
  • the adjustment of the target value It at this time is an adjustment using a threshold value for the remaining amount of the battery 98. Specifically, for example, when the value indicating the remaining amount of the battery 98 is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the target value It is set as the target value It.
  • One value can be set, and if it falls below the threshold value, an adjustment can be made to set a second value ( ⁇ first value) as the target value It.
  • a second value ⁇ first value
  • an adjustment method is also conceivable in which the target value It is set according to the value indicating the remaining amount by using a table or a function indicating the correspondence between the value indicating the remaining amount of the battery 98 and the target value It.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining an image of adjustment, and the solid line in the figure represents an adjustment image as a first modification.
  • the charging current of the capacitor 102 is increased so that the frame speed becomes higher. In this case, the charging current of the capacitor 102 becomes low in the region where the remaining amount of the battery 98 is low, that is, the load of the battery 98 becomes light.
  • the case where the adjustment as the first modification is not performed is represented by the alternate long and short dash line.
  • the charging current of the capacitor 102 is determined by the torque of the motor as the magnetic drive unit 27, the impedance of the motor, and the like, and the performance of the coma speed is also determined according to these factors. Become. Therefore, even though the battery 98 has a large remaining amount and has a sufficient power supply capacity, the frame speed performance cannot be sufficiently brought out. On the other hand, by performing the adjustment as the first modification, the frame speed performance can be sufficiently brought out according to the remaining amount of the battery 98.
  • the frame speed is kept constant (that is, the charging current of the capacitor 102) with respect to the decrease in the remaining amount of the battery 98 in the region where the remaining amount of the battery 98 is small (the region below a predetermined value). It is also possible to make adjustments such as (keep it constant).
  • FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining an image of adjustment as a second modification.
  • the charging voltage of the capacitor 102 is increased.
  • the drive voltage of the magnetic drive unit 27 rises, the output of the magnetic drive unit 27 rises, and the curtain speed can be increased.
  • the charging time of the capacitor 102 is shortened by lowering the charging voltage of the capacitor 102. By shortening the charging time, the frame speed can be improved.
  • FIG. 39 shows a circuit configuration example of the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the image pickup apparatus 1 as a second modification.
  • the DC / DC converter 101 is configured to be able to change the value (voltage value) of the output voltage.
  • the control unit 95 gives an instruction to the DC / DC converter 101 to adjust the value of the output voltage.
  • FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the curtain speed and the frame speed in the second modification, and the plot by the white circle in the figure represents the relationship.
  • the curtain speed and the frame speed when the adjustment as the second modification is not performed are represented by black circles.
  • FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an image of adjustment as a third modification.
  • the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27 is increased.
  • the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27 is increased, as shown in FIG. 41A, the amount of discharge current of the capacitor 102 increases, while the voltage of the capacitor 102 decreases.
  • the output of the magnetic drive unit 27 can be increased to increase the curtain speed.
  • the charging time of the capacitor 102 can be shortened by decreasing the driving current of the magnetic drive unit 27, and the frame speed can be improved by shortening the charging time.
  • the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27 is reduced, the discharge current amount of the capacitor 102 is reduced, while the voltage of the capacitor 102 is increased.
  • FIG. 42 shows a circuit configuration example of the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the image pickup apparatus 1 as a third modification.
  • the driver IC 103 a variable output current type driver IC capable of changing the output current with respect to the magnetic drive unit 27 is used.
  • the control unit 95 gives an instruction to the driver IC 103 to adjust the value of the output current to the magnetic drive unit 27, that is, the value of the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27.
  • FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining an image of a fourth modification.
  • FIG. 43A shows a case where charging is not performed during discharging of the capacitor 102 for comparison
  • FIG. 43B shows charging during discharging of the capacitor 102.
  • the cases of the fourth modification are shown respectively.
  • Charging the capacitor 102 during the discharge period of the capacitor 102 can be rephrased as charging the capacitor 102 while driving the magnetic drive unit 27.
  • the control circuit 104 described above is provided in the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27, and the output current of the DC / DC converter 101 is controlled by a constant current to perform magnetism. This is to prevent fluctuations in the load of the battery 98 as the drive unit 27 from affecting the battery 98 and other devices.
  • the control circuit 104 is provided to achieve a constant current, but instead of this, a constant current circuit may be provided in front of the DC / DC converter 101.
  • imaging means processing such as conversion from photoelectric conversion processing by the image sensor 12 to a digital signal, noise removal by the camera signal processing unit 91, image quality correction, conversion to a brightness / color difference signal, and an image.
  • Imaging of a series of processes from data specification conversion processing such as compression coding / decompression decoding processing of an image signal based on a predetermined image data format by the processing unit 92 to writing processing of an image signal by the recording control unit 94. It refers to a process starting from the photoelectric conversion process by the element 12 up to a part, or a process including all of them. In the above processing, the order of each processing may be changed as appropriate.
  • the first imaging device (1) as the embodiment includes an opening / closing blade (15) that travels in the direction of opening / closing the opening (13a) through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, and an opening / closing blade (15).
  • a motor magnetic drive unit 27
  • a running spring 40
  • control for running control of the opening / closing blades.
  • a unit (95) is provided, and the control unit switches the mode between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
  • the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, switching from the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is high to the traveling mode in which the motor power consumption is low, that is, the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is low from the traveling mode. It is possible to switch to the driving mode. Therefore, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, the opening / closing blades can be traveled in a traveling mode capable of improving quietness and extending the life of the blade opening / closing device. That is, it is possible to improve the quietness and extend the life of the blade opening / closing device.
  • a capacitor (102) that serves as a driving power source for the motor is provided.
  • the driving voltage of the motor can be increased, and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade can be increased.
  • the time required for charging the capacitor can be shortened, so that a mode with a high continuous shooting speed can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to switch between a running mode in which the running speed is prioritized as a running mode in which the power consumption of the motor is high and a running mode in which the continuous shooting speed is prioritized as a running mode in which the power consumption of the motor is low.
  • the control unit has a first traveling mode and a second traveling mode as traveling modes having different power consumption, and the first traveling mode includes both the motor and the traveling spring. Is a mode for transmitting the traveling power, and the second traveling mode is a mode in which the traveling spring transmits the traveling power and the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first traveling mode.
  • the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade is a hybrid traveling mode in which the opening / closing blade is driven by the power of both the motor and the traveling spring, and that only the traveling spring drives the opening / closing blade (the motor drives the opening / closing blade). It is possible to switch to the spring running mode (including the case of slightly assisting).
  • the hybrid driving mode requires a long charging time for the capacitor, but the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades can be increased, and the traveling speed priority driving mode and the spring driving mode, in which the charging time of the capacitor is short and the continuous shooting speed is increased. It is possible to switch to a driving mode that prioritizes continuous shooting speed, which can be increased.
  • the traveling spring is stored by the power of the motor
  • the control unit has a first traveling mode and a second traveling mode as traveling modes having different power consumption.
  • the first traveling mode is a mode in which the number of times the capacitor is charged is less than that of the second traveling mode.
  • the control unit selects the traveling mode based on any of the parameters of the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade, the continuous shooting speed, and the shutter speed. For example, a mode with high motor power consumption should be selected to increase the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades, and a mode with low motor power consumption (that is, a mode with a short charging time) should be selected to increase the continuous shooting speed. You should choose. Further, when increasing the shutter speed, it may be necessary to select a mode in which the motor power consumption is high. Therefore, by selecting the traveling mode based on any of the parameters of the opening / closing blade traveling speed, continuous shooting speed, and shutter speed as described above, it is possible to select an appropriate traveling mode according to the setting of the parameters related to imaging. It can be carried out.
  • the control unit selects the traveling mode based on the parameter of the shutter speed as the strobe synchronization speed.
  • the strobe tuning speed is a speed that cannot be achieved in the driving mode with low motor power consumption
  • the driving mode with high motor power consumption is selected, and conversely, in the driving mode with low motor power consumption.
  • the speed is feasible, it is possible to select a driving mode with low motor power consumption to improve the continuous shooting speed. Therefore, with respect to imaging accompanied by strobe light emission, it is possible to achieve both imaging at a high strobe synchronization speed and imaging at a high continuous shooting speed with one imaging device.
  • the control unit has, as the traveling mode, the first mode and the second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode, and the traveling of the opening / closing blade. If the speed is not specified to be higher than the predetermined speed and the continuous shooting speed is set to be automatically selected, the second mode is selected as the traveling mode. As a result, if the user is set to automatically select the continuous shooting speed when it is estimated that the user does not intend to increase the running speed of the opening / closing blade, the running mode with low motor power consumption (that is, the charging time is short). Mode) can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to select an appropriate driving mode according to the user's intention.
  • the control unit has a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode as the traveling mode, and determines the continuous shooting speed.
  • the first mode is selected as the traveling mode.
  • the control unit controls to adjust the charging time of the capacitor as a control different from the switching of the traveling mode.
  • the charging time of the capacitor By adjusting the charging time of the capacitor, it is possible to change the time required from the start of the release to the start of the next release, that is, the continuous shooting speed can be changed, and the output of the motor can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to change the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in adjusting the continuous shooting speed and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade.
  • the control unit controls to adjust the charging current of the capacitor based on the remaining amount of the battery (98) which is the operating power source of the image pickup apparatus.
  • the remaining battery power is high and the battery has sufficient power supply capacity
  • the current value of the charging current is increased to increase the running speed of the opening / closing blades, and the remaining battery power is low and the battery does not have sufficient power supply capacity.
  • the control unit controls to adjust the charging voltage of the capacitor.
  • the magnitude of the motor output is adjusted, that is, the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is adjusted, and by adjusting the charging time of the capacitor, the continuous shooting speed is adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in adjusting the continuous shooting speed and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade.
  • the control unit controls to adjust the drive current of the motor.
  • the drive current of the motor By adjusting the drive current of the motor, the magnitude of the motor output is adjusted, that is, the traveling speed of the on-off blades is adjusted, and the continuous shooting speed is adjusted by adjusting the charging time of the capacitor. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in adjusting the continuous shooting speed and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade.
  • the capacitor is charged even during the discharge period of the capacitor.
  • the waiting period until the release can be started can be shortened. Therefore, the continuous shooting speed can be improved.
  • the first control method as an embodiment is an opening / closing blade that travels in a direction of opening / closing an opening through which incident light passing through an imaging surface passes, a motor provided that can transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade, and opening / closing.
  • This is a control method in an imaging device including a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the blades and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blades.
  • This is a control method for switching modes between a plurality of driving modes having different power consumptions. Even with such a first control method, the same operations and effects as those of the first imaging device described above can be obtained.
  • the second imaging device (same as 1) as the embodiment has an opening / closing blade that travels in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction of opening / closing the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, and traveling power to the opening / closing blade. It is provided with a motor provided so as to be able to transmit, a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blades, and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blades. , The mode is switched between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades are different.
  • the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring can be switched from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is high to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low. Therefore, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, the opening / closing blades can be traveled in a traveling mode capable of improving quietness and extending the life of the blade opening / closing device. That is, it is possible to improve the quietness and extend the life of the blade opening / closing device.
  • the second control method as an embodiment is provided with an opening / closing blade that travels in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction of opening / closing the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface, and a traveling power that can be transmitted to the opening / closing blade.
  • This is a control method in an imaging device including a motor, a traveling spring provided so as to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blades, and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blades.
  • a mode it is a control method for switching between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades are different.
  • the same operation and effect as the above-mentioned second imaging device can also be obtained by such a second control method.
  • the opening / closing blades operated in the opening / closing direction for opening / closing the opening, the coil (31) to which the driving current is supplied, and the coil are energized.
  • It has a motor (magnetic drive unit 27) having a magnet to be rotated (32) and a rotor gear (33) to be rotated with the rotation of the magnet, and a drive gear (35) to be meshed with the rotor gear.
  • It is equipped with a drive body (34) that rotates synchronously in the direction opposite to the magnet, and a traveling spring (40) that applies urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction to the opening / closing blades via the driving body.
  • the control unit includes a blade opening / closing unit (blade opening / closing device 11) in which the opening / closing blades are operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotation operation of the drive body, and a control unit (95) for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blades.
  • a blade opening / closing unit blade opening / closing device 11
  • a control unit 95 for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blades.
  • the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade the mode is switched between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different.
  • the opening / closing blade can be driven by the driving force of the motor generated by energizing the coil and the urging force of the traveling spring in the driving body.
  • the switching from the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is high to the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is low that is, the opening / closing blades It is possible to switch from a running mode with a high running speed to a running mode with a low running speed. Therefore, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, the opening / closing blades can be traveled in a traveling mode capable of improving quietness and extending the life of the blade opening / closing device. That is, it is possible to improve the quietness and extend the life of the blade opening / closing device.
  • the fourth imaging device (1) of the embodiment includes an opening / closing blade that is operated in the opening / closing direction to open / close the opening, a coil to which a driving current is supplied, and a magnet that is rotated by energizing the coil.
  • a motor having a rotor gear that is rotated with the rotation of the magnet, a drive body that has a drive gear meshed with the rotor gear and is rotated in the opposite direction to the magnet, and opening and closing via the drive body.
  • a blade opening / closing unit that is provided with a traveling spring that applies an urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction of the blades, and the opening / closing blades are operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotational operation of the drive body, and a control that controls the traveling of the opening / closing blades.
  • the control unit is provided with a unit, and as a traveling mode of the opening / closing blade, the mode is switched between a plurality of traveling modes having different traveling speeds of the opening / closing blade.
  • the opening / closing blade can be driven by the driving force of the motor generated by energizing the coil and the urging force of the traveling spring in the driving body.
  • control unit makes it possible to switch the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is fast to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low. .. Therefore, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, the opening / closing blades can be traveled in a traveling mode capable of improving quietness and extending the life of the blade opening / closing device. That is, it is possible to improve the quietness and extend the life of the blade opening / closing device.
  • the present technology can also be configured as follows.
  • An opening / closing blade that travels in the direction of opening / closing the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes.
  • a motor provided so as to be able to transmit running power to the opening / closing blades,
  • a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade,
  • a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade is provided.
  • the control unit An image pickup device that switches between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
  • the imaging device according to (1) above which includes a capacitor that serves as a driving power source for the motor.
  • the control unit It has a first driving mode and a second driving mode as driving modes having different power consumption.
  • the first traveling mode is a mode in which both the motor and the traveling spring transmit the traveling power
  • the second traveling mode is a mode in which the traveling spring transmits the traveling power of the motor.
  • the traveling spring is stored by the power of the motor
  • the control unit It has a first driving mode and a second driving mode as driving modes having different power consumption.
  • the imaging device according to (2) or (3), wherein the first traveling mode is a mode in which the number of times the capacitor is charged is less than that of the second traveling mode.
  • the control unit The imaging device according to any one of (2) to (4), wherein the traveling mode is selected based on any of the parameters of the traveling speed, the continuous shooting speed, and the shutter speed of the opening / closing blade.
  • the control unit The imaging device according to (5) above, wherein the traveling mode is selected based on a parameter of a shutter speed as a strobe synchronization speed.
  • the control unit The traveling mode includes a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode. When the specification for increasing the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade to a predetermined speed or higher is not specified and the continuous shooting speed is set to be automatically selected, the second mode is selected as the traveling mode (2). ) To (6).
  • the control unit The traveling mode includes a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode.
  • the first mode is selected as the traveling mode (2).
  • the control unit The imaging device according to any one of (2) to (8) above, wherein a control for adjusting the charging time of the capacitor is performed as a control different from the switching of the traveling mode.
  • the control unit The imaging device according to (9), wherein the charging current of the capacitor is controlled to be adjusted based on the remaining amount of the battery which is the operating power source of the imaging device.
  • the control unit The imaging device according to (9) or (10), which controls the adjustment of the charging voltage of the capacitor.
  • the control unit The imaging device according to any one of (9) to (11) above, which controls to adjust the drive current of the motor.
  • 1 image pickup device 4 shutter button, 3 flash (strobe), 10 optical system, 11 blade opening / closing device (blade opening / closing unit), 12 imaging element, 13a opening, 15 opening / closing blade, 27 magnetic drive unit (motor), 31 coil, 32 magnet, 33 rotor gear, 34 drive body, 35 drive gear, 40 running spring, 56 electromagnet, 95 control unit, 96 driver unit, 97 operation unit, 98 battery 99 shutter motor driver unit, 100 spring driver unit, 101 DC / DC converter, 102 capacitor, 103 driver IC, 104 control circuit

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Studio Devices (AREA)

Abstract

This imaging device is configured so that an opening/closing blade can be driven using both a motor and a spring, wherein quietness is improved and the life of a blade opening/closing device is extended. The imaging device according to the present technology comprises: an opening/closing blade that travels in a direction to open/close an opening through which incident light passes to an imaging surface; a motor that is provided so as to be capable of transmitting traveling power to the opening/closing blade; a traveling spring that is provided so as to be capable of transmitting traveling power to the opening/closing blade; and a control unit that controls the travel of the opening/closing blade. The control unit switches a mode, as a travel mode of the opening/closing blade, between a plurality of opening/closing blade travel modes in which the power consumption of the motor differs.

Description

撮像装置、制御方法Imaging device, control method
 本技術は、開閉羽根をモータとバネの双方で駆動可能とされた撮像装置、及び該撮像装置における制御方法についての技術分野に関する。 This technology relates to an image pickup device in which an opening / closing blade can be driven by both a motor and a spring, and a technical field regarding a control method in the image pickup device.
 例えば、スチルカメラやビデオカメラ等の各種の撮像装置には、撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する開閉羽根を有した羽根開閉装置(シャッターユニット)を備えたものがある。
 この種の撮像装置には、例えば下記特許文献1に開示されるように、開閉羽根の駆動をモータとバネの双方のトルクにより行うシャッターユニット(以下「ハイブリッドシャッター」と表記する)が知られている。
For example, some image pickup devices such as still cameras and video cameras are provided with a blade opening / closing device (shutter unit) having opening / closing blades for opening / closing an opening through which incident light passing through an imaging surface passes.
In this type of imaging device, for example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1 below, a shutter unit (hereinafter referred to as "hybrid shutter") that drives an opening / closing blade by the torque of both a motor and a spring is known. There is.
特開昭56-72424号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 56-72424
 ハイブリッドシャッターにおいては、開閉羽根の走行速度(いわゆる幕速)を高めることができ、特に、ストロボ同調速度の高速化等にメリットがある。
 しかしながら、幕速が高速になると、開閉羽根の走行に伴う衝撃が大きくなり、シャッター動作時の静音性の低下や羽根開閉装置の寿命低下を招き易くなる。
In the hybrid shutter, the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade (so-called curtain speed) can be increased, and in particular, there is an advantage in increasing the strobe synchronization speed.
However, when the curtain speed becomes high, the impact caused by the traveling of the opening / closing blade becomes large, which tends to reduce the quietness during shutter operation and shorten the life of the blade opening / closing device.
 本技術は上記事情に鑑み為されたものであり、モータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることを目的とする。 This technology was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to improve the quietness of the image pickup device in which the switchgear can be driven by both the motor and the spring, and to extend the life of the switchgear switchgear. To do.
 本技術に係る第一の撮像装置は、撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、前記制御部は、前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行うものである。
 これにより、モータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、モータの消費電力が高い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替え、すなわち、開閉羽根の走行速度が速い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替えが可能とされる。
The first imaging device according to the present technology includes an opening / closing blade that travels in a direction of opening / closing an opening through which incident light passing through an imaging surface passes, a motor provided so as to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade, and a motor. A traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade are provided, and the control unit consumes the motor as a traveling mode of the opening / closing blade. The mode is switched between a plurality of driving modes having different power sources.
As a result, for the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, the motor power consumption is switched from the high running mode to the low running mode, that is, the running speed of the opening / closing blades is low from the fast running mode. It is possible to switch to the driving mode.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記モータの駆動電力源となるキャパシタを備えた構成とすることが考えられる。
 上記のキャパシタを備えることで、モータの駆動電圧を高めることができ、開閉羽根の走行速度の高速化を図ることが可能とされる。さらに、モータの消費電力が低い走行モータではキャパシタの充電に要する時間を短縮化できるため、連写速度の速いモードを実現可能となる。
The first imaging device described above may be configured to include a capacitor that serves as a driving power source for the motor.
By providing the above-mentioned capacitor, the driving voltage of the motor can be increased, and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade can be increased. Further, in a traveling motor having low power consumption of the motor, the time required for charging the capacitor can be shortened, so that a mode with a high continuous shooting speed can be realized.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記制御部は、前記消費電力が異なる走行モードとして第一走行モードと第二走行モードを有し、前記第一走行モードは、前記モータと前記走行バネの双方が前記走行動力を伝達するモードであり、前記第二走行モードは、前記走行バネが前記走行動力を伝達するモードであって前記モータの消費電力が前記第一走行モードよりも低いモードである構成とすることが考えられる。
 これにより、開閉羽根の走行モードとして、モータと走行バネの双方の動力により開閉羽根を駆動するハイブリッド走行モードと、走行バネのみが開閉羽根を駆動するとみなすことのできる(モータが開閉羽根の駆動を僅かにアシストする場合も含む)バネ走行モードとの切り替えを行うことが可能とされる。
In the first imaging device described above, the control unit has a first traveling mode and a second traveling mode as traveling modes having different power consumption, and the first traveling mode includes the motor and the traveling spring. Both are modes for transmitting the traveling power, and the second traveling mode is a mode in which the traveling spring transmits the traveling power and the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first traveling mode. It is conceivable to have a configuration.
As a result, it can be considered that the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade is a hybrid traveling mode in which the opening / closing blade is driven by the power of both the motor and the traveling spring, and that only the traveling spring drives the opening / closing blade (the motor drives the opening / closing blade). It is possible to switch to the spring running mode (including the case of slightly assisting).
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記モータの動力により前記走行バネが蓄勢され、前記制御部は、前記消費電力が異なる走行モードとして第一走行モードと第二走行モードを有し、前記第一走行モードは、前記キャパシタの充電回数が前記第二走行モードよりも少ないモードである構成とすることが考えられる。
 モータの動力により走行バネの蓄勢を行う場合、モータと走行バネの双方による開閉羽根の駆動を可能とするためには、キャパシタの充電として、バネ蓄勢用のモータ駆動電力を得るための充電と、開閉羽根駆動用のモータ駆動電力を得るための充電との2回の充電が必要とされる。このため、上記の第一走行モードではこれら2回の充電を行ってハイブリッド走行モードとしての走行モードを実現し、第二走行モードでは、バネ蓄勢用の充電のみを行って走行バネのみで開閉羽根を駆動するバネ走行モードを実現することが可能とされる。
In the first imaging device described above, the traveling spring is stored by the power of the motor, and the control unit has a first traveling mode and a second traveling mode as traveling modes having different power consumption. The first traveling mode may be configured such that the number of times the capacitor is charged is less than that of the second traveling mode.
When the traveling spring is stored by the power of the motor, in order to enable the opening and closing blades to be driven by both the motor and the traveling spring, the capacitor is charged to obtain the motor drive power for spring energy storage. Two chargings are required, one for obtaining the motor driving power for driving the open / close blades and the other for obtaining the motor driving power. Therefore, in the above-mentioned first running mode, these two charges are performed to realize the running mode as the hybrid running mode, and in the second running mode, only the charging for spring storage is performed and the opening and closing is performed only by the running spring. It is possible to realize a spring running mode that drives the blades.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記制御部は、前記開閉羽根の走行速度、連写速度、シャッタースピードの何れかのパラメータに基づいて前記走行モードを選択する構成とすることが考えられる。
 例えば、開閉羽根の走行速度を速くする場合にはモータ消費電力が高いモードを選択すべきであり、連写速度を速くする場合にはモータ消費電力が低いモード(つまり充電時間が短いモード)を選択すべきである。また、シャッタースピードを速くする場合にはモータ消費電力が高いモードを選択すべき場合が考えられる。
In the first imaging device described above, it is conceivable that the control unit selects the traveling mode based on any of the parameters of the traveling speed, the continuous shooting speed, and the shutter speed of the opening / closing blade.
For example, a mode with high motor power consumption should be selected to increase the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades, and a mode with low motor power consumption (that is, a mode with a short charging time) should be selected to increase the continuous shooting speed. You should choose. Further, when increasing the shutter speed, it may be necessary to select a mode in which the motor power consumption is high.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記制御部は、ストロボ同調速度としてのシャッタースピードのパラメータに基づいて前記走行モードを選択する構成とすることが考えられる。
 これにより、ストロボ同調速度が、モータ消費電力の低い走行モードでは実現不能な速度である場合にはモータ消費電力の高い走行モードを選択し、逆にストロボ同調速度がモータ消費電力の低い走行モードで実現可能な速度である場合にはモータ消費電力の低い走行モードを選択して連写速度の向上を図ることが可能とされる。
In the first imaging device described above, it is conceivable that the control unit selects the traveling mode based on the parameter of the shutter speed as the strobe synchronization speed.
As a result, if the strobe tuning speed is a speed that cannot be achieved in the driving mode with low motor power consumption, the driving mode with high motor power consumption is selected, and conversely, in the driving mode with low motor power consumption. When the speed is feasible, it is possible to select a driving mode with low motor power consumption to improve the continuous shooting speed.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記制御部は、前記走行モードとして、第一モードと前記第一モードよりも前記モータの消費電力が低い第二モードとを有すると共に、前記開閉羽根の走行速度を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず、連写速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合は、前記走行モードとして前記第二モードを選択する構成とすることが考えられる。
 これにより、ユーザーが開閉羽根走行速度を高める意図がないと推定される場合に連写速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合には、モータ消費電力の低い走行モード(つまり充電時間が短いモード)を選択することが可能とされる。
In the first imaging device described above, the control unit has, as the traveling mode, a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode, and the traveling of the opening / closing blade. When the speed is not specified to be increased to a predetermined speed or higher and the continuous shooting speed is set to be automatically selected, it is conceivable that the second mode is selected as the traveling mode.
As a result, if the user is set to automatically select the continuous shooting speed when it is estimated that the user does not intend to increase the running speed of the opening / closing blade, the running mode with low motor power consumption (that is, the charging time is short). Mode) can be selected.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記制御部は、前記走行モードとして、第一モードと前記第一モードよりも前記モータの消費電力が低い第二モードとを有すると共に、連写速度を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず、前記開閉羽根の走行速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合は、前記走行モードとして前記第一モードを選択する構成とすることが考えられる。
 これにより、ユーザーが連写速度を高める意図がないと推定される場合に開閉羽根走行速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合には、モータ消費電力の高い走行モード(つまりモータ出力が高まるモード)を選択することが可能とされる。
In the first imaging device described above, the control unit has, as the traveling mode, a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode, and determines the continuous shooting speed. When the speed is not specified to be higher than the speed and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is set to be automatically selected, it is conceivable that the first mode is selected as the traveling mode.
As a result, when it is estimated that the user does not intend to increase the continuous shooting speed and the setting is made to automatically select the opening / closing blade traveling speed, the traveling mode with high motor power consumption (that is, the motor output increases). Mode) can be selected.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記制御部は、前記走行モードの切り替えとは別の制御として、前記キャパシタの充電時間を調整する制御を行う構成とすることが考えられる。
 キャパシタの充電時間の調整により、レリーズ開始から次のレリーズが開始可能となるまでの所要時間を変化させる、すなわち連写速度を変化させることが可能となると共に、モータの出力を変化させることが可能となるため、開閉羽根の走行速度を変化させることが可能となる。
In the first imaging device described above, it is conceivable that the control unit is configured to control the charging time of the capacitor as a control different from the switching of the traveling mode.
By adjusting the charging time of the capacitor, it is possible to change the time required from the start of the release to the start of the next release, that is, the continuous shooting speed can be changed, and the output of the motor can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to change the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記制御部は、前記撮像装置の動作電力源であるバッテリの残量に基づき前記キャパシタの充電電流を調整する制御を行う構成とすることが考えられる。
 これにより、バッテリ残量が多くバッテリに十分な電力供給能力がある場合には充電電流の電流値を上げて開閉羽根の走行速度を高め、バッテリ残量が少なくバッテリに十分な電力供給能力がない場合には充電電流の電流値を下げてバッテリの出力電圧が徒に低下することの防止を図ることが可能とされる。
In the first imaging device described above, it is conceivable that the control unit controls to adjust the charging current of the capacitor based on the remaining amount of the battery which is the operating power source of the imaging device.
As a result, when the remaining battery power is high and the battery has sufficient power supply capacity, the current value of the charging current is increased to increase the running speed of the opening / closing blades, and the remaining battery power is low and the battery does not have sufficient power supply capacity. In that case, it is possible to reduce the current value of the charging current to prevent the output voltage of the battery from dropping unnecessarily.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記制御部は、前記キャパシタの充電電圧を調整する制御を行う構成とすることが考えられる。
 キャパシタの充電電圧を調整することで、モータ出力の大きさの調整、すなわち開閉羽根の走行速度の調整が行われると共に、キャパシタの充電時間が調整されることで連写速度の調整が行われる。
In the first imaging device described above, it is conceivable that the control unit is configured to control the charging voltage of the capacitor.
By adjusting the charging voltage of the capacitor, the magnitude of the motor output is adjusted, that is, the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is adjusted, and by adjusting the charging time of the capacitor, the continuous shooting speed is adjusted.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記制御部は、前記モータの駆動電流を調整する制御を行う構成とすることが考えられる。
 モータの駆動電流を調整することで、モータ出力の大きさの調整、すなわち開閉羽根の走行速度の調整が行われると共に、キャパシタの充電時間が調整されることで連写速度の調整が行われる。
In the first imaging device described above, it is conceivable that the control unit is configured to control adjusting the drive current of the motor.
By adjusting the drive current of the motor, the magnitude of the motor output is adjusted, that is, the traveling speed of the on-off blades is adjusted, and the continuous shooting speed is adjusted by adjusting the charging time of the capacitor.
 上記した第一の撮像装置においては、前記キャパシタの放電期間中においても前記キャパシタに充電が行われる構成とすることが考えられる。
 これにより、レリーズを開始可能となるまでの待ち期間の短縮化が図られる。
In the first imaging device described above, it is conceivable that the capacitor is charged even during the discharge period of the capacitor.
As a result, the waiting period until the release can be started can be shortened.
 また、本技術に係る第一の制御方法は、撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備える撮像装置における制御方法であって、前記制御部が、前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う制御方法である。
 このような第一の制御方法によっても、上記した第一の撮像装置と同様の作用が得られる。
Further, the first control method according to the present technology is an opening / closing blade that travels in a direction of opening / closing an opening through which incident light passing through an imaging surface passes, and a motor provided so as to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade. A control method in an imaging device including a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade, wherein the control unit opens / closes the opening / closing. This is a control method for switching between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the blades.
Even with such a first control method, the same operation as that of the first image pickup apparatus described above can be obtained.
 また、本技術に係る第二の撮像装置は、撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向である開閉方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、前記制御部は、前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記開閉羽根の走行速度が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行うものである。
 これにより、モータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、開閉羽根の走行速度が速い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替えが可能とされる。
Further, the second imaging device according to the present technology can transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blades that travel in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction in which the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, and the opening / closing blades. A motor provided, a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade, and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade are provided, and the control unit comprises a traveling mode of the opening / closing blade. The mode is switched between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades are different.
As a result, the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring can be switched from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is high to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low.
 本技術に係る第二の制御方法は、撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向である開閉方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備える撮像装置における制御方法であって、前記制御部が、前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記開閉羽根の走行速度が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う制御方法である。
 このような第二の制御方法によっても、上記した第二の撮像装置と同様の作用が得られる。
The second control method according to the present technology is provided with an opening / closing blade that travels in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction in which the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, and a traveling power that can be transmitted to the opening / closing blade. A control method in an imaging device including a motor, a traveling spring provided so as to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade, and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade. The traveling mode of the opening / closing blade is a control method for switching the mode between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is different.
Even with such a second control method, the same operation as that of the above-mentioned second imaging device can be obtained.
 また、本技術に係る第三の撮像装置は、開口を開閉する開閉方向へ動作される開閉羽根と、駆動電流が供給されるコイルと前記コイルへの通電に伴って回転されるマグネットと前記マグネットの回転に伴って回転されるローターギヤとを有するモータと、前記ローターギヤに噛合される駆動ギヤを有し前記マグネットと反対方向へ同期して回動される駆動体と、前記駆動体を介して前記開閉羽根に前記開閉方向における一方への付勢力を付与する走行バネとを備え、前記開閉羽根が前記駆動体の回動動作に伴って前記開閉方向へ動作される羽根開閉ユニットと、前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、前記制御部は、前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行うものである。
 上記構成による羽根開閉ユニットにおいては、コイルへの通電に伴って発生するモータの駆動力と駆動体における走行バネの付勢力とによって開閉羽根を走行させることが可能になる。また、上記の制御部により、このようにモータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、モータの消費電力が高い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替え、すなわち、開閉羽根の走行速度が速い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替えが可能とされる。
Further, the third imaging device according to the present technology includes an opening / closing blade that operates in the opening / closing direction to open / close the opening, a coil to which a driving current is supplied, a magnet that is rotated by energizing the coil, and the magnet. A motor having a rotor gear that is rotated with the rotation of the magnet, a drive body that has a drive gear that is meshed with the rotor gear and is rotated in the opposite direction to the magnet, and a drive body that rotates in the opposite direction to the magnet. The blade opening / closing unit is provided with a traveling spring that applies an urging force to one of the opening / closing blades in the opening / closing direction, and the opening / closing blade is operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotation operation of the drive body. The control unit includes a control unit that controls the traveling of the opening / closing blade, and the control unit switches the mode between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
In the blade opening / closing unit having the above configuration, the opening / closing blade can be driven by the driving force of the motor generated by energizing the coil and the urging force of the traveling spring in the driving body. Further, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring by the above control unit, the switching from the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is high to the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is low, that is, the opening / closing blades It is possible to switch from a running mode with a high running speed to a running mode with a low running speed.
 さらに、本技術に係る第四の撮像装置は、開口を開閉する開閉方向へ動作される開閉羽根と、駆動電流が供給されるコイルと前記コイルへの通電に伴って回転されるマグネットと前記マグネットの回転に伴って回転されるローターギヤとを有するモータと、前記ローターギヤに噛合される駆動ギヤを有し前記マグネットと反対方向へ同期して回動される駆動体と、前記駆動体を介して前記開閉羽根に前記開閉方向における一方への付勢力を付与する走行バネとを備え、前記開閉羽根が前記駆動体の回動動作に伴って前記開閉方向へ動作される羽根開閉ユニットと、前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、前記制御部は、前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記開閉羽根の走行速度が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行うものである。
 上記構成による羽根開閉ユニットにおいては、コイルへの通電に伴って発生するモータの駆動力と駆動体における走行バネの付勢力とによって開閉羽根を走行させることが可能になる。また、上記の制御部により、このようにモータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、開閉羽根の走行速度が速い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替えが可能とされる。
Further, the fourth imaging device according to the present technology includes an opening / closing blade that operates in the opening / closing direction to open / close the opening, a coil to which a driving current is supplied, a magnet that is rotated by energizing the coil, and the magnet. A motor having a rotor gear that is rotated with the rotation of the magnet, a drive body that has a drive gear meshed with the rotor gear and is rotated in the opposite direction to the magnet, and the drive body. The blade opening / closing unit is provided with a traveling spring that applies an urging force to one of the opening / closing blades in the opening / closing direction, and the opening / closing blade is operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotational operation of the drive body. The control unit includes a control unit that controls the traveling of the opening / closing blades, and the control unit switches the mode between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades are different as the traveling modes of the opening / closing blades.
In the blade opening / closing unit having the above configuration, the opening / closing blade can be driven by the driving force of the motor generated by energizing the coil and the urging force of the traveling spring in the driving body. Further, the above-mentioned control unit makes it possible to switch the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is fast to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low. ..
本技術に係る実施形態としての撮像装置の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the image pickup apparatus as an embodiment which concerns on this technique. 撮像装置を図1とは異なる方向から見た状態で示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the image pickup apparatus in the state which was seen from the direction different from FIG. 撮像装置の概略側面図である。It is a schematic side view of the image pickup apparatus. 羽根開閉装置の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the blade opening / closing device. 羽根開閉装置の分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view of the blade opening / closing device. 開閉羽根が開放位置に保持されている状態を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the state which the opening / closing blade is held in an open position. 開閉羽根が閉塞位置に保持されている状態を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the state which the opening / closing vane is held in a closed position. 駆動機構等を示す分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view which shows the drive mechanism and the like. 駆動機構等を図8とは異なる方向から見た状態で示す分解斜視図である。It is an exploded perspective view which shows the drive mechanism and the like as seen from the direction different from FIG. マグネットとギヤ体と駆動体を示す拡大斜視図である。It is an enlarged perspective view which shows a magnet, a gear body, and a drive body. マグネットとギヤ体と駆動体を図10とは異なる方向から見た状態で示す拡大斜視図である。FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a magnet, a gear body, and a drive body as viewed from a direction different from that of FIG. ロック動作ユニットを示す拡大斜視図である。It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the lock operation unit. ロック動作ユニットを図12とは異なる方向から見た状態で示す拡大斜視図である。It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the lock operation unit as seen from the direction different from FIG. 図15乃至図18と共に羽根開閉装置の動作を示すものであり、本図は、駆動機構の初期状態を示す背面図である。15 to 18 show the operation of the blade opening / closing device, and this figure is a rear view showing an initial state of the drive mechanism. 開閉羽根の閉塞動作が開始された直後の駆動機構の状態を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the state of the drive mechanism immediately after the closing operation of an opening / closing blade is started. 図15に引き続いて開閉羽根の閉塞動作が行われ、駆動体の連結軸がブレーキレバーに接した状態を示す背面図である。FIG. 15 is a rear view showing a state in which the opening / closing blades are closed and the connecting shaft of the driving body is in contact with the brake lever. 図16に引き続いて開閉羽根の閉塞動作が行われ、駆動体がブレーキレバーによって減速されると共にブレーキレバーの押圧軸によってロック解除体が押圧された状態を示す背面図である。FIG. 16 is a rear view showing a state in which the opening / closing blades are closed, the drive body is decelerated by the brake lever, and the unlocked body is pressed by the pressing shaft of the brake lever. 開閉羽根の開放動作が行われるときの駆動機構の状態を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time of opening operation of an opening / closing vane. 変形例に係るロック動作ユニットを示す拡大斜視図である。It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the lock operation unit which concerns on a modification. 変形例に係るロック動作ユニットを図19とは異なる方向から見た状態で示す拡大斜視図である。FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a lock operation unit according to a modified example as viewed from a direction different from that of FIG. 図22乃至図26と共に変形例に係るロック動作ユニットが用いられた羽根開閉装置の動作を示すものであり、本図は、駆動機構の初期状態を示す背面図である。22 to 26 show the operation of the blade opening / closing device using the lock operation unit according to the modified example, and this figure is a rear view showing the initial state of the drive mechanism. 開閉羽根の閉塞動作が開始された直後の駆動機構の状態を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the state of the drive mechanism immediately after the closing operation of an opening / closing blade is started. 図22に引き続いて開閉羽根の閉塞動作が行われ、駆動体の連結軸がブレーキレバーに接した状態を示す背面図である。FIG. 22 is a rear view showing a state in which the opening / closing blades are closed and the connecting shaft of the driving body is in contact with the brake lever. 図23に引き続いて開閉羽根の閉塞動作が行われ、駆動体がブレーキレバーによって減速されると共にブレーキレバーの押圧軸によって解除アームが押圧された状態を示す背面図である。FIG. 23 is a rear view showing a state in which the opening / closing blades are closed, the drive body is decelerated by the brake lever, and the release arm is pressed by the pressing shaft of the brake lever. 図24に引き続き解除アームと保持レバーがロック保持位置まで回動された状態を示す背面図である。FIG. 24 is a rear view showing a state in which the release arm and the holding lever are rotated to the lock holding position following FIG. 24. 開閉羽根の開放動作が行われるときの駆動機構の状態を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time of opening operation of an opening / closing vane. 実施形態としての撮像装置の電気的な内部構成例を示したブロック図である。It is a block diagram which showed the electric internal structure example of the image pickup apparatus as an embodiment. 本実施形態における磁気駆動部(モータ)の駆動系の回路構成例を示した図である。It is a figure which showed the circuit structure example of the drive system of the magnetic drive part (motor) in this embodiment. 走行モードごとの動作を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating operation for each traveling mode. ストロボ同調速度に応じた走行モード切り替えのための処理を示したフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which showed the process for switching a running mode according to a strobe tuning speed. 制御例Iにおけるシャッタースピード、幕速、コマ速のHi/Lowの定義を説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the definition of Hi / Low of a shutter speed, a curtain speed, and a frame speed in control example I. 制御例Iにおけるシャッタースピード、幕速、コマ速の設定の組み合わせを示しである。A combination of shutter speed, curtain speed, and frame speed settings in Control Example I is shown. 制御例Iとしての処理を説明するためのフローチャートである。It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process as control example I. 同じく、制御例Iとしての処理を説明するためのフローチャートである。Similarly, it is a flowchart for demonstrating the process as control example I. 同じく、制御例Iとしての処理を説明するためのフローチャートである。Similarly, it is a flowchart for demonstrating the process as control example I. 第一変形例としての撮像装置における磁気駆動部の駆動系の回路構成例を示した図である。It is a figure which showed the circuit structure example of the drive system of the magnetic drive part in the image pickup apparatus as a 1st modification. 第一変形例における調整のイメージを説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the image of adjustment in the 1st modification. 第二変形例としての調整のイメージを説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the image of adjustment as a 2nd modification. 第二変形例としての撮像装置における磁気駆動部の駆動系の回路構成例を示した図である。It is a figure which showed the circuit structure example of the drive system of the magnetic drive part in the image pickup apparatus as a 2nd modification. 第二変形例における幕速とコマ速の関係を例示した図である。It is a figure which illustrated the relationship between the curtain speed and the frame speed in the 2nd modification. 第三変形例としての調整のイメージを説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the image of adjustment as a 3rd modification. 第三変形例としての撮像装置1における磁気駆動部27の駆動系の回路構成例を示した図である。It is a figure which showed the circuit structure example of the drive system of the magnetic drive part 27 in the image pickup apparatus 1 as a third modification. 第四変形例のイメージを説明するための図である。It is a figure for demonstrating the image of the 4th modification. 第四変形例としての撮像装置における磁気駆動部の駆動系の回路構成例を示した図である。It is a figure which showed the circuit structure example of the drive system of the magnetic drive part in the image pickup apparatus as a 4th modification.
 以下に、本技術を実施するための形態を添付図面を参照して説明する。
 なお、説明は以下の順序で行う。
<1.機械的構成>
[1-1.撮像装置の概略構成]
[1-2.羽根開閉装置の構成]
[1-3.羽根開閉装置の動作]
[1-4.まとめ]
[1-5.変形例]
[1-6.変形例に係るロック動作ユニットが用いられた羽根開閉装置の動作]
<2.電気的構成>
[2-1.撮像装置の電気的構成例]
[2-2.走行モードについて]
[2-3.制御例I]
[2-4.制御例II]
[2-5.第一変形例]
[2-6.第二変形例]
[2-7.第三変形例]
[2-8.第四変形例]
[2-9.「撮像」について]
<3.実施形態のまとめ>
<4.本技術>
Hereinafter, a mode for carrying out the present technology will be described with reference to the attached drawings.
The explanation will be given in the following order.
<1. Mechanical configuration>
[1-1. Schematic configuration of the imaging device]
[1-2. Configuration of blade switchgear]
[1-3. Operation of blade switchgear]
[1-4. Summary]
[1-5. Modification example]
[1-6. Operation of the blade switchgear using the lock operation unit according to the modified example]
<2. Electrical configuration>
[2-1. Electrical configuration example of image pickup device]
[2-2. About driving mode]
[2-3. Control example I]
[2-4. Control example II]
[2-5. First modification]
[2-6. Second variant]
[2-7. Third variant]
[2-8. Fourth variant]
[2-9. About "imaging"]
<3. Summary of embodiments>
<4. This technology>
 以下に示す実施形態は、本技術に係る撮像装置をスチルカメラに適用し、本技術に係る羽根開閉装置(羽根開閉ユニット)をこのスチルカメラに設けられたフォーカルプレーンシャッターに適用したものである。
 特に本実施形態において、撮像装置は撮像素子を備えたデジタルカメラとされ、フォーカルプレーンシャッターとしては、先幕の走行が撮像素子の電荷リセットにより実現される電子先幕としての形態により行われ、後幕の走行は開閉羽根の走行として実現される例を挙げる。
In the embodiment shown below, the imaging device according to the present technology is applied to a still camera, and the blade opening / closing device (blade opening / closing unit) according to the present technology is applied to a focal plane shutter provided in the still camera.
In particular, in the present embodiment, the image pickup device is a digital camera provided with an image pickup element, and the focal plane shutter is formed as an electronic front curtain in which the traveling of the front curtain is realized by resetting the charge of the image pickup element. An example is given in which the running of the curtain is realized as the running of the opening / closing blade.
 尚、本技術の適用範囲はスチルカメラ及びスチルカメラに設けられたフォーカルプレーンシャッターに限られることはなく、例えば、ビデオカメラや他の機器に組み込まれる各種の撮像装置及びこれらの撮像装置に設けられるアイリス等の各種の羽根開閉装置に広く適用することができる。 The scope of application of this technology is not limited to still cameras and focal plane shutters provided in still cameras, and is provided in, for example, various image pickup devices incorporated in video cameras and other devices, and these image pickup devices. It can be widely applied to various blade opening / closing devices such as irises.
 以下の説明にあっては、スチルカメラを用いた撮影を行う撮影者としてのユーザーから見た方向で前後上下左右の方向を示すものとする。従って、被写体側が前方となり、ユーザー側が後方となる。 In the following explanation, the direction as seen from the user as a photographer who shoots with a still camera shall indicate the front-back, up-down, left-right directions. Therefore, the subject side is the front side and the user side is the rear side.
 尚、以下に示す前後上下左右の方向は説明の便宜上のものであり、本技術の実施に関しては、これらの方向に限定されることはない。 The directions shown below are for convenience of explanation, and the implementation of the present technology is not limited to these directions.
 また、以下に示すレンズ群は、単数又は複数のレンズにより構成されたものの他、これらの単数又は複数のレンズとアイリス等の他の光学素子を含んでもよい。
Further, the lens group shown below may include those composed of a single or a plurality of lenses, these single or a plurality of lenses, and other optical elements such as an iris.
<1.機械的構成>
[1-1.撮像装置の概略構成]

 先ず、撮像装置の概略構成について説明する(図1乃至図3参照)。
 撮像装置1は、図1及び図2に示すように、例えば、横長の扁平な筐体2の内外に所要の各部が配置されて成る。撮像装置1は、図1に示すように、交換レンズ200の着脱が可能な装置であってもよい。
<1. Mechanical configuration>
[1-1. Schematic configuration of the imaging device]

First, a schematic configuration of the image pickup apparatus will be described (see FIGS. 1 to 3).
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the image pickup apparatus 1 is composed of, for example, required parts arranged inside and outside a horizontally long flat housing 2. As shown in FIG. 1, the image pickup device 1 may be a device in which the interchangeable lens 200 can be attached and detached.
 筐体2の前面にはフラッシュ(ストロボ)3が設けられている。筐体2の上面にはシャッター釦4、ズームスイッチ5及び電源釦6が設けられている(図1及び図2参照)。筐体2の後面にはディスプレイ7と各種の操作部8、8、・・・とファインダー9が設けられている。 A flash (strobe) 3 is provided on the front surface of the housing 2. A shutter button 4, a zoom switch 5, and a power button 6 are provided on the upper surface of the housing 2 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). A display 7, various operation units 8, 8, ..., And a finder 9 are provided on the rear surface of the housing 2.
 筐体2の内部には、図3に示すように、レンズ群や光学素子等を有する光学系10と、光学系10によって取り込まれた光の量を制御する、具体的には撮像素子12の撮像面への入射光を遮蔽自在とされた羽根開閉装置(羽根開閉ユニット:本例ではフォーカルプレーンシャッター)11と、羽根開閉装置11を介して取り込まれた光を光電変換する撮像素子12とが前側から順に配置されている。
Inside the housing 2, as shown in FIG. 3, an optical system 10 having a lens group, an optical element, and the like, and specifically, an image sensor 12 that controls the amount of light taken in by the optical system 10. The blade opening / closing device (blade opening / closing unit: focal plane shutter in this example) 11 that can shield the light incident on the image pickup surface, and the image sensor 12 that photoelectrically converts the light captured through the blade opening / closing device 11 They are arranged in order from the front side.
[1-2.羽根開閉装置の構成]

 以下に、羽根開閉装置11の構成について説明する(図4乃至図13参照)。
 羽根開閉装置11は、ベース体13と押さえ板14と開閉羽根15とリンク16、16と駆動機構17を有し、撮像素子12の前面側に配置されている(図4乃至図6参照)。
[1-2. Configuration of blade switchgear]

The configuration of the blade opening / closing device 11 will be described below (see FIGS. 4 to 13).
The blade opening / closing device 11 has a base body 13, a pressing plate 14, opening / closing blades 15, links 16, 16 and a drive mechanism 17, and is arranged on the front surface side of the image pickup element 12 (see FIGS. 4 to 6).
 ベース体13は、例えば、横長の矩形状に形成され、前後に貫通された矩形状の開口13aを有している(図4及び図5参照)。開口13aは撮像素子12の撮像面における光の有効入射領域より一回り大きくされている。撮像面における光の有効入射領域は、光学系10によって取り込まれ画像を生成するために必要な光が入射される領域である。 The base body 13 is formed, for example, in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and has a rectangular opening 13a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The opening 13a is one size larger than the effective incident region of light on the image pickup surface of the image pickup device 12. The effective incident region of light on the imaging surface is a region in which light captured by the optical system 10 and necessary for generating an image is incident.
 ベース体13における開口13aの下方の部分は開閉羽根15が開放位置において保持される保持領域となる保持部18として設けられ、ベース体13における開口13aの一方の側方の部分は取付部19として設けられている。ベース体13の後側には撮像素子12が配置される。 The lower portion of the opening 13a in the base body 13 is provided as a holding portion 18 serving as a holding region in which the opening / closing blade 15 is held in the open position, and one side portion of the opening 13a in the base body 13 is used as the mounting portion 19. It is provided. The image sensor 12 is arranged on the rear side of the base body 13.
 取付部19における側方の端部には前方に突出された支持ピン19a、19aが上下に離隔して設けられている。取付部19には軸移動孔19bが形成され、軸移動孔19bは略円弧状に形成されている。 Support pins 19a and 19a projecting forward are provided at the lateral ends of the mounting portion 19 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction. A shaft moving hole 19b is formed in the mounting portion 19, and the shaft moving hole 19b is formed in a substantially arc shape.
 押さえ板14はベース体13と略同じ大きさ及び形状に形成され、透過孔14aを有している。押さえ板14は開閉羽根15を挟んだ状態でベース体13に前側から取り付けられる。押さえ板14がベース体13に取り付けられた状態においては、開口13aが透過孔14aの真後ろに位置される。 The holding plate 14 is formed in substantially the same size and shape as the base body 13 and has a through hole 14a. The holding plate 14 is attached to the base body 13 from the front side with the opening / closing blade 15 sandwiched between them. When the pressing plate 14 is attached to the base body 13, the opening 13a is located directly behind the transmission hole 14a.
 押さえ板14には逃げ孔14bが形成され、逃げ孔14bは円弧状に形成されている。 A relief hole 14b is formed in the holding plate 14, and the relief hole 14b is formed in an arc shape.
 開閉羽根15は複数枚のシート状のセクター15a、15a、・・・によって構成されている(図5参照)。フォーカルプレーンシャッターとして機能する羽根開閉装置11においては、例えば、撮像素子12を制御することにより先幕として機能する電子幕と機械的な構造として設けられ後幕として機能する開閉羽根15との組み合わせによる所謂電子先幕シャッターの構成にされている。 The opening / closing blade 15 is composed of a plurality of sheet-shaped sectors 15a, 15a, ... (See FIG. 5). In the blade opening / closing device 11 that functions as a focal plane shutter, for example, a combination of an electronic curtain that functions as a front curtain by controlling the image sensor 12 and an opening / closing blade 15 that is provided as a mechanical structure and functions as a rear curtain is used. It has a so-called electronic front curtain shutter configuration.
 セクター15a、15a、・・・は横長の形状に形成され、例えば、4枚が設けられている。開閉羽根15はセクター15a、15a、・・・の少なくとも一部同士が厚み方向において重なって位置されている。セクター15a、15a、・・・は双方のリンク16、16にそれぞれ回動可能に連結されている。 The sectors 15a, 15a, ... Are formed in a horizontally long shape, and for example, four sectors are provided. At least a part of the sectors 15a, 15a, ... The opening / closing blade 15 is positioned so as to overlap each other in the thickness direction. The sectors 15a, 15a, ... Are rotatably connected to both links 16 and 16, respectively.
 リンク16、16はシート状に形成され、平行リンクとして機能する。リンク16、16には長手方向における一端部にそれぞれ支持孔16a、16aが形成されている。一方のリンク16には長手方向における一端寄りの部分に長穴状の連結孔16bが形成されている。リンク16、16は支持孔16a、16aにそれぞれベース体13の支持ピン19a、19aが挿入され、ベース板13と押さえ板14に対して支持ピン19a、19aを支点として回動される。 The links 16 and 16 are formed in a sheet shape and function as parallel links. Support holes 16a and 16a are formed in the links 16 and 16 at one end in the longitudinal direction, respectively. One link 16 is formed with an elongated connecting hole 16b at a portion closer to one end in the longitudinal direction. The links 16 and 16 have the support pins 19a and 19a of the base body 13 inserted into the support holes 16a and 16a, respectively, and are rotated with respect to the base plate 13 and the holding plate 14 with the support pins 19a and 19a as fulcrums.
 リンク16、16は駆動機構17の駆動力によって平行な状態を保持したままでベース板13と押さえ板14に対して回動される。リンク16、16が回動されると、セクター15a、15a、・・・が略上下方向へ移動(走行)される。このときセクター15a、15a、・・・は移動量が異なり、重なる面積が変化され、ベース体13の開口13aを開放する開放位置(図6参照)と開口13aを閉塞する閉塞位置(図7参照)との間で開閉動作される。 The links 16 and 16 are rotated with respect to the base plate 13 and the holding plate 14 while maintaining a parallel state by the driving force of the driving mechanism 17. When the links 16 and 16 are rotated, the sectors 15a, 15a, ... Are moved (traveled) substantially in the vertical direction. At this time, the movement amounts of the sectors 15a, 15a, ... Are different, the overlapping area is changed, and the opening position (see FIG. 6) for opening the opening 13a of the base body 13 and the closing position for closing the opening 13a (see FIG. 7). ) Is opened and closed.
 上記のように開閉羽根15が移動されるときには、セクター15a、15a、・・・は移動される位置に応じて重なる面積が変化され、開放位置において最も面積が小さくされている。 When the opening / closing blade 15 is moved as described above, the overlapping area of the sectors 15a, 15a, ... Is changed according to the moved position, and the area is the smallest in the open position.
 従って、開放位置において開閉羽根15の配置スペースが小さくなると共に閉塞位置において開閉羽根15の面積が最も大きくなるため、開閉羽根15の移動方向における羽根開閉装置11の小型化を図ることができると共に十分な大きさの開口13aを形成することができる。 Therefore, since the space for arranging the opening / closing blades 15 becomes smaller at the open position and the area of the opening / closing blades 15 becomes the largest at the closed position, the blade opening / closing device 11 can be sufficiently miniaturized in the moving direction of the opening / closing blades 15. An opening 13a having a large size can be formed.
 尚、開閉羽根15とベース体13の前面との間及び開閉羽根15と押さえ板14の後面との間にはそれぞれ開口13aに対応して位置される光透過孔を有する図示しないシートが配置され、これらのシートによって開閉羽根15の動作の円滑化が図られている。 A sheet (not shown) having a light transmitting hole located corresponding to the opening 13a is arranged between the opening / closing blade 15 and the front surface of the base body 13 and between the opening / closing blade 15 and the rear surface of the holding plate 14, respectively. , These sheets facilitate the operation of the opening / closing blade 15.
 駆動機構17は配置ベース20に所要の各部が配置されて構成されている(図5、図8及び図9参照)。 The drive mechanism 17 is configured by arranging the required parts on the arrangement base 20 (see FIGS. 5, 8 and 9).
 配置ベース20は前後方向を向く縦長の板状に形成されている。配置ベース20には下端寄りの位置に軸動作孔20aが形成されている(図8及び図9参照)。配置ベース20はベース体13の取付部19に後方から取り付けられる。 The arrangement base 20 is formed in a vertically long plate shape facing the front-rear direction. A shaft operating hole 20a is formed in the arrangement base 20 at a position near the lower end (see FIGS. 8 and 9). The arrangement base 20 is attached to the attachment portion 19 of the base body 13 from the rear.
 配置ベース20にはバネ支持シャフト21とローターシャフト22と駆動シャフト23とロックシャフト24が取り付けられている。バネ支持シャフト21とローターシャフト22と駆動シャフト23とロックシャフト24はそれぞれ配置ベース20から後方に突出されている。配置ベース20の後面にはブレーキ支持軸25とストッパー26が取り付けられ、ブレーキ支持軸25とストッパー26は軸動作孔20aの周囲に位置されている。 A spring support shaft 21, a rotor shaft 22, a drive shaft 23, and a lock shaft 24 are attached to the arrangement base 20. The spring support shaft 21, the rotor shaft 22, the drive shaft 23, and the lock shaft 24 are respectively projected rearward from the arrangement base 20. A brake support shaft 25 and a stopper 26 are attached to the rear surface of the arrangement base 20, and the brake support shaft 25 and the stopper 26 are located around the shaft operating hole 20a.
 駆動機構17には磁気駆動部(モータ)27が設けられている。磁気駆動部27は取付板28と第1のヨーク29と第2のヨーク30とコイル31とマグネット32を有している。 The drive mechanism 17 is provided with a magnetic drive unit (motor) 27. The magnetic drive unit 27 has a mounting plate 28, a first yoke 29, a second yoke 30, a coil 31, and a magnet 32.
 取付板28は前後方向を向く状態にされ、取付板28に第1のヨーク29と第2のヨーク30が取り付けられている。 The mounting plate 28 is oriented in the front-rear direction, and the first yoke 29 and the second yoke 30 are attached to the mounting plate 28.
 第1のヨーク29には前後に貫通されたマグネット配置孔29aが形成されている。第1のヨーク29は配置ベース20の後面における上半部に取り付けられる。第2のヨーク30は上下方向を向く板状に形成された基部30aと基部30aから下方に突出された芯部30bとを有し、基部30aが第1のヨーク29の上方に位置されている。コイル31は芯部30bに巻き付けられた状態で配置され、ステーターとして機能する。 The first yoke 29 is formed with magnet arrangement holes 29a penetrating the front and rear. The first yoke 29 is attached to the upper half of the rear surface of the placement base 20. The second yoke 30 has a base portion 30a formed in a plate shape facing in the vertical direction and a core portion 30b protruding downward from the base portion 30a, and the base portion 30a is located above the first yoke 29. .. The coil 31 is arranged in a state of being wound around the core portion 30b, and functions as a stator.
 マグネット32はローターとして機能し、軸方向が前後方向にされた円筒状に形成されている(図10及び図11参照)。マグネット32の軸方向における一端面にはローターローターギヤ33が取り付けられている。マグネット32とローターギヤ33はローターシャフト22に支持され、ローターシャフト22を支点として一体になって回転可能にされている。マグネット32は第1のヨーク29が配置ベース20に取り付けられた状態において、マグネット配置孔29aに挿入されて配置される。 The magnet 32 functions as a rotor and is formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction in the front-rear direction (see FIGS. 10 and 11). A rotor rotor gear 33 is attached to one end surface of the magnet 32 in the axial direction. The magnet 32 and the rotor gear 33 are supported by the rotor shaft 22, and are integrally rotatable around the rotor shaft 22 as a fulcrum. The magnet 32 is inserted into the magnet placement hole 29a and placed in a state where the first yoke 29 is attached to the placement base 20.
 上記のように構成された磁気駆動部27において、コイル31に電流が供給されると、電流の方向(極性)に応じた方向へマグネット32とローターギヤ33が一体になって回転される。マグネット32とローターギヤ33は駆動体34と同期して回転される。 In the magnetic drive unit 27 configured as described above, when a current is supplied to the coil 31, the magnet 32 and the rotor gear 33 are integrally rotated in a direction corresponding to the direction (polarity) of the current. The magnet 32 and the rotor gear 33 are rotated in synchronization with the drive body 34.
 駆動体34は駆動ギヤ35と駆動レバー36と被支持軸部37を有し回動可能にされている。 The drive body 34 has a drive gear 35, a drive lever 36, and a supported shaft portion 37, and is rotatable.
 駆動ギヤ35は平ギヤである。駆動ギヤ35には外周部の一部から後方に突出されることによりバネ掛け部35aが設けられている。 The drive gear 35 is a spur gear. The drive gear 35 is provided with a spring hooking portion 35a by projecting rearward from a part of the outer peripheral portion.
 駆動レバー36は所定の形状の板状に形成され、一方向に延びる結合ベース36aと結合ベース36aの長手方向における中央部から突出された突部36bとを有している。結合ベース36aの長手方向における一端部には図示しない貫通孔が形成されている。突部36bは結合ベース36aに直交する方向へ突出されている。結合ベース36aの長手方向における他端部には前方に突出された連結軸38が取り付けられている。突部36bには前方に突出された戻し軸39が取り付けられている。結合ベース36aの長手方向における他端部には切欠が形成され、この切欠によって被ロック部36cが形成されている。結合ベース36aの被ロック部36c側の端縁は摺動傾斜縁36dとして形成されている。 The drive lever 36 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined shape, and has a coupling base 36a extending in one direction and a protrusion 36b protruding from the central portion in the longitudinal direction of the coupling base 36a. A through hole (not shown) is formed at one end of the coupling base 36a in the longitudinal direction. The protrusion 36b projects in a direction orthogonal to the coupling base 36a. A connecting shaft 38 projecting forward is attached to the other end of the coupling base 36a in the longitudinal direction. A return shaft 39 projecting forward is attached to the protrusion 36b. A notch is formed at the other end of the coupling base 36a in the longitudinal direction, and the locked portion 36c is formed by this notch. The edge of the coupling base 36a on the locked portion 36c side is formed as a sliding inclined edge 36d.
 駆動レバー36は結合ベース36aの一端部が駆動ギヤ35の後面に結合され、貫通孔が駆動ギヤ35の中心孔に一致される。結合ベース36aが駆動ギヤ35に結合された状態において、連結軸38と戻し軸39は駆動ギヤ35の外周側に位置される。 One end of the coupling base 36a of the drive lever 36 is coupled to the rear surface of the drive gear 35, and the through hole coincides with the center hole of the drive gear 35. In a state where the coupling base 36a is coupled to the drive gear 35, the coupling shaft 38 and the return shaft 39 are located on the outer peripheral side of the drive gear 35.
 被支持軸部37は軸方向が前後方向である円筒状に形成された筒状部37aと筒状部37aの軸方向における一端部から外方に張り出されたフランジ部37bとを有している。被支持軸部37はフランジ部37bが結合ベース36aの一端部に結合され、駆動ギヤ35と同軸上に位置される。 The supported shaft portion 37 has a cylindrical portion 37a formed in a cylindrical shape whose axial direction is the front-rear direction, and a flange portion 37b protruding outward from one end portion in the axial direction of the tubular portion 37a. There is. The supported shaft portion 37 has a flange portion 37b coupled to one end of the coupling base 36a and is positioned coaxially with the drive gear 35.
 駆動体34は走行バネ40によって回動方向における一方向へ付勢されている。走行バネ40は、例えば、捩じりコイルバネであり、被支持軸部37の筒状部37aに支持されている。走行バネ40は、一端部が磁気駆動部27における、例えば、取付板28の一部に係合され、他端部が駆動ギヤ35のバネ掛け部35aに係合される。 The drive body 34 is urged in one direction in the rotation direction by the traveling spring 40. The traveling spring 40 is, for example, a torsion coil spring, and is supported by a tubular portion 37a of a supported shaft portion 37. One end of the traveling spring 40 is engaged with, for example, a part of the mounting plate 28 in the magnetic drive unit 27, and the other end is engaged with the spring hooking portion 35a of the drive gear 35.
 駆動体34は駆動シャフト23に支持され、駆動シャフト23を支点として回転可能にされる。駆動体34は走行バネ40によって一方の回動方向へ付勢され、駆動ギヤ35と駆動レバー36と被支持軸部37が一体になって走行バネ40の付勢力(駆動力)によって一方の回動方向へ回動可能にされる。駆動体34は走行バネ40の付勢力に反する方向における回動端である第1の回動端と走行バネ40の付勢力の方向における回動端である第2の回動端との間で回動される。 The drive body 34 is supported by the drive shaft 23 and is rotatable around the drive shaft 23 as a fulcrum. The drive body 34 is urged in one rotation direction by the traveling spring 40, and the drive gear 35, the drive lever 36, and the supported shaft portion 37 are integrated and one rotation is performed by the urging force (driving force) of the traveling spring 40. It is made rotatable in the direction of movement. The drive body 34 is located between the first rotating end, which is the rotating end in the direction opposite to the urging force of the traveling spring 40, and the second rotating end, which is the rotating end in the direction of the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated.
 上記のように構成された駆動体34は駆動ギヤ35が磁気駆動部27のローターギヤ33に噛合される。従って、磁気駆動部27のローター32とローターギヤ33は、駆動体34と反対方向へ同期して回動される。 In the drive body 34 configured as described above, the drive gear 35 is meshed with the rotor gear 33 of the magnetic drive unit 27. Therefore, the rotor 32 and the rotor gear 33 of the magnetic drive unit 27 are rotated in synchronization with the drive body 34 in the opposite direction.
 駆動体34が駆動シャフト23に支持された状態において、駆動レバー36に取り付けられた連結軸38が配置ベース20の軸動作孔20aから前方に突出される。 In a state where the drive body 34 is supported by the drive shaft 23, the connecting shaft 38 attached to the drive lever 36 projects forward from the shaft operation hole 20a of the arrangement base 20.
 駆動機構17にはロック動作ユニット41が設けられている(図8及び図9参照)。ロック動作ユニット41はロック解除体42とロック部材43を有している(図12及び図13参照)。 The drive mechanism 17 is provided with a lock operation unit 41 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). The locking operation unit 41 has an unlocking body 42 and a locking member 43 (see FIGS. 12 and 13).
 ロック解除体42は解除ベース44と吸着片45を有し、ロック保持位置とロック解除位置の間で回動可能にされている。 The unlocking body 42 has an unlocking base 44 and a suction piece 45, and is rotatable between a lock holding position and an unlocking position.
 解除ベース44は略上下方向を向く板状のベース面部46とベース面部46に対して上方に折り曲げられた第1の支持面部47とベース面部46に対して上方に折り曲げられた第2の支持面部48とを有し、第1の支持面部47と第2の支持面部48が前後で対向して位置され、第1の支持面部47が第2の支持面部48の後方に位置されている。 The release base 44 has a plate-shaped base surface portion 46 that faces substantially vertically, a first support surface portion 47 that is bent upward with respect to the base surface portion 46, and a second support surface portion that is bent upward with respect to the base surface portion 46. The first support surface portion 47 and the second support surface portion 48 are positioned so as to face each other in the front-rear direction, and the first support surface portion 47 is located behind the second support surface portion 48.
 第1の支持面部47の一部はベース面部46から側方に突出された第1のバネ受け部47aとして設けられ、第2の支持面部48の一部はベース面部46から側方に突出された第2のバネ受け部48aとして設けられ、第1のバネ受け部47aと第2のバネ受け部48aとが前後で対向して位置されている。第2の支持面部48の他の一部はベース面部46から側方における第2のバネ受け部48aと反対方向に突出され、この突出された部分が解除受け部48bとして設けられている。第1の支持面部47には解除受け部48bから下方に突出された規制突部48cが設けられている。 A part of the first support surface portion 47 is provided as a first spring receiving portion 47a projecting laterally from the base surface portion 46, and a part of the second support surface portion 48 projects laterally from the base surface portion 46. It is provided as a second spring receiving portion 48a, and the first spring receiving portion 47a and the second spring receiving portion 48a are positioned so as to face each other in the front-rear direction. The other part of the second support surface portion 48 is projected from the base surface portion 46 in the direction opposite to the second spring receiving portion 48a on the side, and this protruding portion is provided as the release receiving portion 48b. The first support surface portion 47 is provided with a regulation protrusion 48c protruding downward from the release receiving portion 48b.
 第1のバネ受け部47aと第2のバネ受け部48aにはそれぞれ略円筒状の第1のバネ支持部材49と第2のバネ支持部材50が取り付けられている。 A substantially cylindrical first spring support member 49 and a second spring support member 50 are attached to the first spring receiving portion 47a and the second spring receiving portion 48a, respectively.
 第1のバネ支持部材49にはロック解除バネ51が支持されている。ロック解除バネ51は、例えば、捩じりコイルバネであり、一端部が配置ベース20に取り付けられたバネ支持シャフト21に係合され他端部が第1の支持面部47に係合されている。 The unlocking spring 51 is supported by the first spring supporting member 49. The unlocking spring 51 is, for example, a torsion coil spring, one end of which is engaged with a spring support shaft 21 attached to the arrangement base 20, and the other end of which is engaged with a first support surface portion 47.
 吸着片45は磁性金属材料によって形成され、固定軸52を介して解除ベース44のベース面部46に固定されている。吸着片45はベース面部46の左右方向における一端部の上面側に位置されている。 The suction piece 45 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is fixed to the base surface portion 46 of the release base 44 via the fixed shaft 52. The suction piece 45 is located on the upper surface side of one end portion of the base surface portion 46 in the left-right direction.
 ロック部材43は解除ベース44の前側において第2の支持面部48に対向して位置された被支持板部53と被支持板部53に対して直交し解除ベース44の下側においてベース面部46の前端部に対向して位置された被押圧板部54とを有している。被支持板部53には前後に貫通された軸挿通孔53aが形成されている。被支持板部53には下方に突出されたロック部53bが設けられている。ロック部材43はロック位置と非ロック位置の間で回動可能にされている。 The lock member 43 is orthogonal to the supported plate portion 53 and the supported plate portion 53 located on the front side of the release base 44 facing the second support surface portion 48, and the base surface portion 46 is located on the lower side of the release base 44. It has a pressed plate portion 54 positioned so as to face the front end portion. A shaft insertion hole 53a is formed in the supported plate portion 53 through the front and rear. The supported plate portion 53 is provided with a lock portion 53b protruding downward. The lock member 43 is rotatable between a locked position and a non-locked position.
 第2のバネ支持部材50にはロックバネ55が支持されている。ロックバネ55のバネ力はロック解除バネ51のバネ力より小さくされている。ロックバネ55は、例えば、捩じりコイルバネであり、一端部が解除ベース44の第2の支持面部48に係合され他端部がロック部材43の被支持板部53に係合されている。 A lock spring 55 is supported by the second spring support member 50. The spring force of the lock spring 55 is smaller than the spring force of the unlock spring 51. The lock spring 55 is, for example, a torsion coil spring, one end of which is engaged with the second support surface portion 48 of the release base 44, and the other end of which is engaged with the supported plate portion 53 of the lock member 43.
 ロック動作ユニット41は配置ベース20に取り付けられたロックシャフト24がロック部材43の軸挿通孔53aと第1のバネ支持部材49と第2のバネ支持部材50に挿入されることによりロックシャフト24に支持され、ロックシャフト24を支点としてロック解除体42とロック部材43が各別に回動可能にされている。 The lock operation unit 41 is inserted into the lock shaft 24 by inserting the lock shaft 24 attached to the arrangement base 20 into the shaft insertion hole 53a of the lock member 43, the first spring support member 49, and the second spring support member 50. It is supported, and the unlocking body 42 and the locking member 43 are individually rotatable around the lock shaft 24 as a fulcrum.
 ロック動作ユニット41がロックシャフト24を支点として回動可能にされた状態において、ロック解除体42はロック解除バネ51によってベース面部46がロック部材43の被押圧部板54に近付く方向へ付勢され、ロック部材43はロックバネ55によって被押圧部板54がベース面部46に近付く方向へ付勢される。従って、ロック解除バネ51とロックバネ55の付勢方向はロック動作ユニット41の回動方向において反対方向にされており、ロック解除体42とロック部材43に回動方向において付勢力以外の力が付与されていない状態においては、ロック解除体42の規制突部48cにロック部材43の被押圧板部54が押し付けられた状態にされる。 In a state where the lock operation unit 41 is rotatable around the lock shaft 24 as a fulcrum, the lock release body 42 is urged by the lock release spring 51 in a direction in which the base surface portion 46 approaches the pressed portion plate 54 of the lock member 43. The lock member 43 is urged by the lock spring 55 in the direction in which the pressed portion plate 54 approaches the base surface portion 46. Therefore, the urging directions of the lock release spring 51 and the lock spring 55 are opposite to each other in the rotation direction of the lock operation unit 41, and a force other than the urging force is applied to the lock release body 42 and the lock member 43 in the rotation direction. In the unlocked state, the pressed plate portion 54 of the lock member 43 is pressed against the regulation protrusion 48c of the unlocking body 42.
 ロック解除体42は吸着片45が電磁石56に吸着可能にされている。電磁石56は二股状に形成された磁力発生部57と一対のコイル部58、58とを有している。磁力発生部57は二股状の部分が前後に並ぶ一対の吸着部57a、57aとして設けられ、コイル部58、58がそれぞれ吸着部57a、57aに巻き付けられている。 In the unlocking body 42, the suction piece 45 can be attracted to the electromagnet 56. The electromagnet 56 has a magnetic force generating portion 57 formed in a bifurcated shape and a pair of coil portions 58, 58. The magnetic force generating portion 57 is provided as a pair of suction portions 57a and 57a in which bifurcated portions are lined up in the front-rear direction, and the coil portions 58 and 58 are wound around the suction portions 57a and 57a, respectively.
 電磁石56は、例えば、取付板28に取り付けられている。ロック解除体42は吸着部57a、57aの先端面が吸着片45の上面に対向して位置されている。電磁石56においては、コイル部58、58に通電されることにより吸着片45に対する吸着力が消失し、コイル部58、58に対する通電が停止されることにより吸着片45に対する吸着力が発生する。 The electromagnet 56 is attached to, for example, the mounting plate 28. The unlocked body 42 is positioned so that the tip surfaces of the suction portions 57a and 57a face the upper surface of the suction piece 45. In the electromagnet 56, the suction force on the suction piece 45 disappears when the coil portions 58 and 58 are energized, and the suction force on the suction piece 45 is generated when the energization on the coil portions 58 and 58 is stopped.
 駆動機構17にはブレーキレバー59が設けられている(図8及び図9参照)。ブレーキレバー59は略V字状に形成され、配置ベース20に取り付けられたブレーキ支持軸25を支点として回動可能にされている。ブレーキレバー59は駆動体34の減速を開始する減速開始位置と回動が停止される回動停止位置との間で回動される。 The drive mechanism 17 is provided with a brake lever 59 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). The brake lever 59 is formed in a substantially V shape and is rotatable around a brake support shaft 25 attached to the arrangement base 20 as a fulcrum. The brake lever 59 is rotated between the deceleration start position at which the drive body 34 starts deceleration and the rotation stop position at which the rotation is stopped.
 ブレーキレバー59はV字の屈曲部分がブレーキ支持軸25に支持されている。ブレーキレバー59は、ブレーキ支持軸25に支持された部分から一方に延びる部分がブレーキアーム60として設けられ、ブレーキ支持軸28に支持された部分から他方に延びる部分が作用アーム61として設けられている。作用アーム61の先端部には押圧軸62が、例えば、回転可能に支持されている。 The V-shaped bent portion of the brake lever 59 is supported by the brake support shaft 25. The brake lever 59 is provided with a portion extending from the portion supported by the brake support shaft 25 to one side as a brake arm 60, and a portion extending from the portion supported by the brake support shaft 28 to the other side as an action arm 61. .. A pressing shaft 62 is rotatably supported at the tip of the acting arm 61, for example.
 ブレーキレバー59はブレーキ支持軸25に与圧バネ63を介して支持ピン64によって支持されている。従って、ブレーキレバー59は与圧バネ63によって配置ベース20に一定の負荷が付与された状態で支持され、与圧バネ63によって発生する配置ベース20との間の摩擦力より大きな回動力が付与されたときに配置ベース20に対して回動される。 The brake lever 59 is supported by a support pin 64 via a pressurizing spring 63 on the brake support shaft 25. Therefore, the brake lever 59 is supported by the pressurization spring 63 in a state where a constant load is applied to the arrangement base 20, and a rotational force larger than the frictional force with the arrangement base 20 generated by the pressurization spring 63 is applied. At that time, it is rotated with respect to the arrangement base 20.
 上記のように駆動体34とロック動作ユニット41とブレーキレバー59が配置ベース20に対して回動可能に支持された状態において、磁気駆動部27の第1のヨーク29と第2のヨーク30が配置ベース20の上半部に取り付けられる。このとき、上記したように、マグネット32は第1のヨーク29のマグネット配置孔29aに挿入され、駆動レバー36に取り付けられた連結軸38と戻し軸39は配置ベース20の軸動作孔20aから前方に突出される(図5参照)。 In a state where the drive body 34, the lock operation unit 41, and the brake lever 59 are rotatably supported with respect to the arrangement base 20 as described above, the first yoke 29 and the second yoke 30 of the magnetic drive unit 27 are It is attached to the upper half of the placement base 20. At this time, as described above, the magnet 32 is inserted into the magnet arrangement hole 29a of the first yoke 29, and the connecting shaft 38 and the return shaft 39 attached to the drive lever 36 are forward from the shaft operation hole 20a of the arrangement base 20. (See FIG. 5).
 また、配置ベース20は、上記したように、ベース体13の取付部19に後方から取り付けられ、連結軸38がベース体13の軸移動孔19bから前方に突出され押さえ板14の逃げ孔14bに挿入される。連結軸38は一方のリンク16に形成された連結孔16bに挿入される。従って、駆動体34が回動されると連結軸38が移動され、リンク16、16が平行な状態を保持したままで回動され、駆動体34の回動に伴ってセクター15a、15a、・・・が略上下方向へ移動される。
Further, as described above, the arrangement base 20 is attached to the mounting portion 19 of the base body 13 from the rear, and the connecting shaft 38 projects forward from the shaft moving hole 19b of the base body 13 to the escape hole 14b of the holding plate 14. Will be inserted. The connecting shaft 38 is inserted into a connecting hole 16b formed in one of the links 16. Therefore, when the drive body 34 is rotated, the connecting shaft 38 is moved, the links 16 and 16 are rotated while maintaining the parallel state, and the sectors 15a, 15a, ...・ ・ Is moved in the vertical direction.
[1-3.羽根開閉装置の動作]

 以下に、羽根開閉装置11における動作について説明する(図14乃至図18参照)。
[1-3. Operation of blade switchgear]

The operation of the blade opening / closing device 11 will be described below (see FIGS. 14 to 18).
 先ず、駆動機構17における各部の初期状態について説明する(図14参照)。 First, the initial state of each part of the drive mechanism 17 will be described (see FIG. 14).
 撮像装置1の電源釦6が操作される前の初期状態においては、コイル31に通電が行われておらず磁気駆動部27に駆動力が発生しておらずマグネット32の回転が停止された状態にされている。 In the initial state before the power button 6 of the image pickup apparatus 1 is operated, the coil 31 is not energized, the magnetic drive unit 27 is not generating a driving force, and the rotation of the magnet 32 is stopped. Has been made.
 初期状態において、電磁石56には通電が行われておらず、磁力発生部57に磁力が発生している。従って、磁力発生部57によって吸着片45が引き寄せられ、吸着部57a、57aによって吸着片45が吸着されている。従って、ロック解除体42がロック保持位置に保持されている。 In the initial state, the electromagnet 56 is not energized, and a magnetic force is generated in the magnetic force generating portion 57. Therefore, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the magnetic force generating portion 57, and the suction piece 45 is attracted by the suction portions 57a and 57a. Therefore, the unlocking body 42 is held at the lock holding position.
 このときロック部材43にはロックバネ55により被押圧部板54がベース面部46に近付く方向への付勢力が付与されており、被押圧板部54がロック解除体42の規制突部48cに押し当てられてロック部材43がロック位置に保持されている。 At this time, the lock member 43 is given an urging force in the direction in which the pressed portion plate 54 approaches the base surface portion 46 by the lock spring 55, and the pressed plate portion 54 presses against the regulation protrusion 48c of the unlocked body 42. The lock member 43 is held at the lock position.
 ロック部材43がロック位置に保持されている状態において、駆動体34における駆動レバー36の被ロック部36cがロック部材43のロック部53bに係合され、駆動体34は走行バネ40の付勢力に反して回動が規制されロック状態にされ第1の回動端に保持されている。従って、走行バネ40の付勢力によって発生する駆動力が駆動体34から開閉羽根15に伝達されていない状態にあり、例えば、開閉羽根15が開放位置に保持されている。 In a state where the lock member 43 is held in the locked position, the locked portion 36c of the drive lever 36 in the drive body 34 is engaged with the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43, and the drive body 34 exerts an urging force on the traveling spring 40. On the contrary, the rotation is restricted and locked, and the rotation is held at the first rotation end. Therefore, the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40 is not transmitted from the driving body 34 to the opening / closing blade 15, for example, the opening / closing blade 15 is held in the open position.
 このとき撮像素子12は電子幕(先幕)によって露光動作(電荷蓄積)が行われていない状態(非露光状態)にされている。 At this time, the image sensor 12 is in a state (non-exposure state) in which the exposure operation (charge accumulation) is not performed by the electronic curtain (front curtain).
 初期状態において、ブレーキレバー59は減速開始位置に保持されており、ブレーキアーム60が駆動体34の駆動レバー36に取り付けられた連結軸38から離隔され、作用アーム61に取り付けられた押圧軸62が解除ベース44における第2の支持面部48の解除受け部48bから離隔されている。 In the initial state, the brake lever 59 is held at the deceleration start position, the brake arm 60 is separated from the connecting shaft 38 attached to the drive lever 36 of the drive body 34, and the pressing shaft 62 attached to the action arm 61 The release base 44 is separated from the release receiving portion 48b of the second support surface portion 48.
 上記した初期状態において、電磁石56に対する通電が行われると、開閉羽根15の開閉動作が開始される(図15参照)。尚、開閉羽根15の開閉動作が開始される際には、既に電子幕の制御(電子幕の走行)は開始されている。 In the above-mentioned initial state, when the electromagnet 56 is energized, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 is started (see FIG. 15). When the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 is started, the control of the electronic curtain (running of the electronic curtain) has already started.
 尚、撮像装置1においては、磁気駆動部27の駆動力と走行バネ40の駆動力の双方の駆動力によって開閉羽根15を動作させることが可能であり、また、走行バネ40の駆動力のみによって開閉羽根15を動作させることも可能である。以下には、磁気駆動部27の駆動力と走行バネ40の駆動力の双方の駆動力によって開閉羽根15が開放位置から閉塞位置まで回動される例を説明する。また、開閉羽根15の閉塞位置から開放位置までの動作は磁気駆動部27の駆動力によって行われる。 In the image pickup apparatus 1, the opening / closing blade 15 can be operated by both the driving force of the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force of the traveling spring 40, and the opening / closing blade 15 can be operated only by the driving force of the traveling spring 40. It is also possible to operate the opening / closing blade 15. An example in which the opening / closing blade 15 is rotated from the open position to the closed position by both the driving force of the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force of the traveling spring 40 will be described below. Further, the operation from the closed position to the open position of the opening / closing blade 15 is performed by the driving force of the magnetic driving unit 27.
 電磁石56に対する通電が行われると、開閉羽根15の開放位置から閉塞位置へ向けての動作が開始される。開閉羽根15の開放位置から閉塞位置へ向けての動作が行われるときには、電子幕と開閉羽根15の間にスリットが形成される状態で開閉羽根15の動作速度に応じて電子幕が制御され、形成されるスリットを介して撮像素子12に光が入射されて露光が行われる。
 尚、シャッタースピード(露光時間)の設定によっては、電子幕の走行終了時点以降に開閉羽根15の走行が開始されるように(つまり開口13aが先幕と後幕の何れにも閉塞されていない全開状態となる期間が得られるように)電子幕と開閉羽根15の走行動作が制御されることもある。
When the electromagnet 56 is energized, the operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the open position to the closed position is started. When the operation from the open position to the closed position of the opening / closing blade 15 is performed, the electronic curtain is controlled according to the operating speed of the opening / closing blade 15 in a state where a slit is formed between the electronic curtain and the opening / closing blade 15. Light is incident on the image pickup device 12 through the formed slit to perform exposure.
Depending on the setting of the shutter speed (exposure time), the opening / closing blade 15 is not blocked by either the front curtain or the rear curtain so that the opening / closing blade 15 starts traveling after the end of the traveling of the electronic curtain (that is, the opening 13a is not blocked). The traveling operation of the electronic curtain and the opening / closing blade 15 may be controlled (so that a period during which the electronic curtain is fully opened can be obtained).
 電磁石56に対する通電が行われると、磁力発生部57に発生していた磁力が消失し、吸着部57a、57aによる吸着片45の吸着が解除される。従って、ロック解除体42がロック解除バネ51の付勢力によってロック保持位置からロック解除位置へ向けて回動されていく。 When the electromagnet 56 is energized, the magnetic force generated in the magnetic force generating unit 57 disappears, and the suction pieces 45 are released from being attracted by the suction parts 57a and 57a. Therefore, the unlocking body 42 is rotated from the lock holding position to the unlocked position by the urging force of the unlocking spring 51.
 ロック解除体42がロック保持位置からロック解除位置へ向けて回動されていくと、ロック解除体42の規制突部48cによってロック部材43の被押圧板部54が押圧され、駆動体34の被ロック部36cとロック部材43のロック部53bとの係合が解除される。従って、ロック部材43がロックバネ55の付勢力に反してロック解除体42と一体になってロック位置から非ロック位置へ向けて回動されていく。 When the unlocking body 42 is rotated from the lock holding position to the unlocking position, the pressing plate portion 54 of the lock member 43 is pressed by the restricting protrusion 48c of the unlocking body 42, and the driven body 34 is covered. The engagement between the lock portion 36c and the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43 is released. Therefore, the lock member 43 is integrated with the unlocking body 42 against the urging force of the lock spring 55 and is rotated from the locked position to the unlocked position.
 ロック解除位置へ向けて回動されたロック解除体42は、一部が配置ベース20に取り付けられ又は配置ベース20に形成された図示しない回動規制部に接して回動が停止されロック解除位置に保持される。同時に、非ロック位置へ向けてロック解除体42と一体になって回動されたロック部材43は、ロック解除体42に伴って回動が停止され非ロック位置に保持される。 The unlocked body 42 rotated toward the unlocked position is partially attached to the arrangement base 20 or comes into contact with a rotation restricting portion (not shown) formed on the arrangement base 20 to stop rotation and the unlocked position. Is held in. At the same time, the lock member 43 that has been rotated integrally with the unlocked body 42 toward the unlocked position is stopped rotating along with the unlocked body 42 and is held in the unlocked position.
 一方、駆動体34の被ロック部36cとロック部材43のロック部53bとの係合が解除されると、走行バネ40の付勢力によって駆動体34が第1の回動端から第2の回動端へ向けて回動され、走行バネ40の付勢力により発生する駆動力が駆動体34を介して開閉羽根15に伝達され開閉羽根15が駆動体34の回動に伴って開放位置から閉塞位置へ向けて動作される。 On the other hand, when the locked portion 36c of the drive body 34 and the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43 are disengaged, the drive body 34 is rotated from the first rotation end to the second rotation by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated toward the moving end, and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40 is transmitted to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34, and the opening / closing blade 15 is closed from the open position as the driving body 34 rotates. It is operated toward the position.
 このとき電磁石56に対する通電と同時に磁気駆動部27のコイル31に対する通電が行われ、ローターとして機能するマグネット32とローターギヤ33とが一体になって駆動体34と反対方向へ回転され、磁気駆動部27において発生した駆動力がローターギヤ33から駆動体34を介して開閉羽根15に伝達される。従って、開閉羽根15は磁気駆動部27において発生する駆動力と走行バネ40の付勢力によって発生する駆動力との双方の駆動力によって動作され、開放位置から閉塞位置へ向けて高速で動作される。 At this time, the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 is energized at the same time as the electromagnet 56 is energized, and the magnet 32 functioning as a rotor and the rotor gear 33 are integrally rotated in the direction opposite to the drive body 34, and the magnetic drive unit is energized. The driving force generated in 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34. Therefore, the opening / closing blade 15 is operated by both the driving force generated by the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40, and is operated at high speed from the open position to the closed position. ..
 引き続き、コイル31に対する通電が行われ、開閉羽根15がさらに閉塞位置へ向けて動作される(図16参照)。 Subsequently, the coil 31 is energized, and the opening / closing blade 15 is further operated toward the closed position (see FIG. 16).
 磁気駆動部27と駆動体34は引き続き同期して反対方向へ回動され、駆動体34が走行バネ40の付勢力によって第2の回動端へ向けてさらに回動される。第2の回動端へ向けてさらに回動された駆動体34は駆動レバー36に取り付けられた連結軸38が減速開始位置に保持されているブレーキレバー59のブレーキアーム60に接触され、ブレーキレバー59が連結軸38に押圧され摩擦力に反して減速開始位置から回動停止位置へ向けて回動されていく。従って、駆動体34はブレーキレバー59によって回動速度が第2の回動端に近付くに従って次第に低下されていき、開閉羽根15の動作速度も閉塞位置に近付くに従って次第に低下されていく。 The magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are continuously rotated in opposite directions in synchronization with each other, and the drive body 34 is further rotated toward the second rotation end by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. The drive body 34 further rotated toward the second rotation end is brought into contact with the brake arm 60 of the brake lever 59 whose connecting shaft 38 attached to the drive lever 36 is held at the deceleration start position, and the brake lever 59 is pressed against the connecting shaft 38 and is rotated from the deceleration start position to the rotation stop position against the frictional force. Therefore, the rotation speed of the drive body 34 is gradually reduced by the brake lever 59 as it approaches the second rotation end, and the operating speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is also gradually reduced as it approaches the closed position.
 このときブレーキレバー59の回動により押圧軸62がロック解除体42の解除受け部48bに接触される。ブレーキレバー59の押圧軸62がロック解除体42の解除受け部48bに接触されたときには、電磁石56に対する通電が停止される。従って、再び磁力発生部57に磁力が発生する。 At this time, the pressing shaft 62 is brought into contact with the unlocking receiving portion 48b of the unlocking body 42 by the rotation of the brake lever 59. When the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59 comes into contact with the unlocking receiving portion 48b of the unlocking body 42, the energization of the electromagnet 56 is stopped. Therefore, the magnetic force is generated again in the magnetic force generating unit 57.
 さらに磁気駆動部27と駆動体34は同期して反対方向へ回動され、ブレーキレバー59が連結軸38に押圧されて引き続き回動され、ブレーキアーム60が配置ベース20に取り付けられたストッパー26に接してブレーキレバー59の回動が停止される(図17参照)。 Further, the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are synchronously rotated in opposite directions, the brake lever 59 is pressed by the connecting shaft 38 and continuously rotated, and the brake arm 60 is attached to the stopper 26 attached to the arrangement base 20. The rotation of the brake lever 59 is stopped in contact with the brake lever 59 (see FIG. 17).
 ブレーキレバー59はストッパー26に接することにより回動停止位置に保持され、ブレーキレバー59の回動の停止に伴って駆動体34とマグネット32とローターギヤ33の回動が停止され、駆動体34が第2の回動端に保持される。このとき磁気駆動部27のコイル31に対する通電が停止されている。 The brake lever 59 is held in the rotation stop position by coming into contact with the stopper 26, and the rotation of the drive body 34, the magnet 32, and the rotor gear 33 is stopped when the rotation of the brake lever 59 is stopped, and the drive body 34 is moved. It is held at the second rotating end. At this time, the energization of the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 is stopped.
 ブレーキレバー59が連結軸38に押圧されて回動されるときには、ブレーキレバー59の押圧軸62によってロック解除体42の解除受け部48bが押圧されロック解除体42がロック解除バネ51の付勢力に反してロック解除位置からロック保持位置へ向けて回動されていく。このときロック部材43にはロックバネ55の付勢力が付与されているため、ロック部材43はロック解除体42と一体になって非ロック位置からロック位置へ向けて回動されていく。 When the brake lever 59 is pressed by the connecting shaft 38 and rotated, the release receiving portion 48b of the unlocking body 42 is pressed by the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59, and the unlocking body 42 becomes the urging force of the unlocking spring 51. On the contrary, it is rotated from the unlocked position to the locked holding position. At this time, since the urging force of the lock spring 55 is applied to the lock member 43, the lock member 43 is integrated with the unlocking body 42 and is rotated from the non-locked position to the locked position.
 尚、上記には、ブレーキレバー59の押圧軸62がロック解除体42の解除受け部48bに接触されたときに電磁石56に対する通電が停止される例を示したが、ブレーキレバー59が回動停止位置まで回動され駆動体34が第2の回動端まで回動されたときに、電磁石56に対する通電が停止されてもよい。 In the above example, when the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59 comes into contact with the unlocking receiving portion 48b of the unlocking body 42, the energization of the electromagnet 56 is stopped, but the brake lever 59 stops rotating. When the drive body 34 is rotated to the position and the drive body 34 is rotated to the second rotation end, the energization of the electromagnet 56 may be stopped.
 上記のように駆動体34が第2の回動端に保持されたときには、駆動体34の回動に伴って動作された開閉羽根15が閉塞位置に至り開閉羽根15の開放位置から閉塞位置までの動作が終了し、ベース体13の開口13aが閉塞される。 When the drive body 34 is held at the second rotating end as described above, the opening / closing blade 15 operated by the rotation of the driving body 34 reaches the closing position and from the opening position to the closing position of the opening / closing blade 15. Is completed, and the opening 13a of the base body 13 is closed.
 このとき電磁石56に対する通電が停止されて磁力発生部57に磁力が発生している。従って、磁力発生部57によって吸着片45が引き寄せられ、吸着部57a、57aによって吸着片45が吸着され、ロック解除体42がロック保持位置まで回動されて初期状態に戻りロック部材43がロック位置まで回動されて初期状態に戻る。 At this time, the energization of the electromagnet 56 is stopped and a magnetic force is generated in the magnetic force generating portion 57. Therefore, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the magnetic force generating unit 57, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the suction parts 57a and 57a, the unlocking body 42 is rotated to the lock holding position, and the lock member 43 returns to the initial state and the lock member 43 is in the lock position. It is rotated to return to the initial state.
 開閉羽根15の開放位置から閉塞位置までの動作が終了すると、続いて、開閉羽根15の閉塞位置から開放位置までの動作が開始される。開閉羽根15の閉塞位置から開放位置までの動作が開始されるときには、撮像素子12は電子幕によって前述した非露光状態にされる。 When the operation from the open position to the closed position of the opening / closing blade 15 is completed, the operation from the closed position to the open position of the opening / closing blade 15 is subsequently started. When the operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the closed position to the open position is started, the image sensor 12 is put into the non-exposure state described above by the electronic curtain.
 開閉羽根15の閉塞位置から開放位置までの動作は磁気駆動部27のコイル31に対して先程とは反対方向への通電(逆極性による通電)が行われることにより開始される(図18参照)。 The operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the closed position to the open position is started by energizing the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the opposite direction (energization due to the opposite polarity) (see FIG. 18). ..
 コイル31に反対方向への通電が行われると、磁気駆動部27において発生した駆動力がローターギヤ33から駆動体34に伝達されて駆動体34が走行バネ40の付勢力に反して第2の回動端から第1の回動端まで回動されて初期状態に戻り、磁気駆動部27において発生した駆動力がローターギヤ33から駆動体34を介して開閉羽根15に伝達されて開閉羽根15が閉塞位置から開放位置まで動作される。 When the coil 31 is energized in the opposite direction, the driving force generated in the magnetic driving unit 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the driving body 34, and the driving body 34 is subjected to the second force against the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated from the rotating end to the first rotating end to return to the initial state, and the driving force generated in the magnetic drive unit 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34, and the opening / closing blade 15 Is operated from the closed position to the open position.
 上記のように駆動体34が第2の回動端から第1の回動端にかけて回動されることにより、捩じりコイルバネとしての走行バネ40は巻き上げられ、駆動体34に対する付勢力を増していく。すなわち、走行バネ40は磁気駆動部27の動力によって巻き上げられて蓄勢される(つまり動力がチャージされる)。 When the drive body 34 is rotated from the second rotation end to the first rotation end as described above, the traveling spring 40 as the torsion coil spring is wound up, and the urging force on the drive body 34 is increased. To go. That is, the traveling spring 40 is wound up by the power of the magnetic drive unit 27 and stored (that is, the power is charged).
 駆動体34が第2の回動端から第1の回動端まで回動されるときには、駆動体34の連結軸38がブレーキアーム60から離隔されるが、駆動体34の戻し軸39がブレーキアーム60に連結軸38の接触方向と反対方向から接触され、戻し軸39によってブレーキレバー59が回動停止位置から減速開始位置まで回動されて初期状態に戻る。ブレーキレバー59は回動停止位置から減速開始位置へ向けて回動されることにより、押圧軸62が解除ベース44の解除受け部48bから離隔される。 When the drive body 34 is rotated from the second rotation end to the first rotation end, the connecting shaft 38 of the drive body 34 is separated from the brake arm 60, but the return shaft 39 of the drive body 34 brakes. The arm 60 is contacted from the direction opposite to the contact direction of the connecting shaft 38, and the brake lever 59 is rotated from the rotation stop position to the deceleration start position by the return shaft 39 to return to the initial state. The brake lever 59 is rotated from the rotation stop position to the deceleration start position, so that the pressing shaft 62 is separated from the release receiving portion 48b of the release base 44.
 駆動体34が第2の回動端から第1の回動端まで回動されるときには、ロック部材43が非ロック位置からロック位置まで回動されており、駆動レバー36の摺動傾斜縁36dがロック部材43のロック部53bに摺動され、一旦、ロック部材43がロックバネ55の付勢力に反して回動される。さらに駆動体34が第1の回動端まで回動されると、摺動傾斜縁36dがロック部53bを乗り越え、ロックバネ55の付勢力によってロック部材43が回動されて被ロック部36cがロック部53bに係合され、駆動体34は走行バネ40の付勢力に反して回動が規制されロック状態にされ第1の回動端に保持されて初期状態に戻る。 When the drive body 34 is rotated from the second rotating end to the first rotating end, the lock member 43 is rotated from the unlocked position to the locked position, and the sliding inclined edge 36d of the drive lever 36d. Is slid on the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43, and the lock member 43 is once rotated against the urging force of the lock spring 55. Further, when the drive body 34 is rotated to the first rotation end, the sliding inclined edge 36d gets over the lock portion 53b, and the lock member 43 is rotated by the urging force of the lock spring 55 to lock the locked portion 36c. Engaged with the portion 53b, the drive body 34 is restricted from rotating against the urging force of the traveling spring 40, is locked, and is held at the first rotating end to return to the initial state.
 駆動体34が第1の回動端に保持されて初期状態に戻ったときには、コイル31に対する反対方向への通電が停止され、磁気駆動部27に開閉羽根15に対する駆動力が発生していない状態にされる。 When the drive body 34 is held by the first rotating end and returns to the initial state, the energization of the coil 31 in the opposite direction is stopped, and the magnetic drive unit 27 does not generate a driving force for the opening / closing blade 15. Be made.
 上記したように、撮像装置1においては、先幕として機能する電子幕と機械的な構造として設けられ後幕として機能する開閉羽根15との組み合わせによる所謂電子先幕シャッターの構成にされている。 As described above, the image pickup apparatus 1 has a so-called electronic front curtain shutter configuration by combining an electronic curtain that functions as a front curtain and an opening / closing blade 15 that is provided as a mechanical structure and functions as a rear curtain.
 撮像装置には、先幕と後幕をともに電子的に行う電子シャッターが用いられたものがあり、この場合には先幕は電荷のクリア(リセット)で行い、後幕は連続した読み出しで行う。しかしながら、電子シャッターの場合にはセンサーの読出速度で律速されるため、動く被写体を撮影した画像が歪んでしまう所謂ローリングシャッター歪みと称される不具合を生じるおそれがある。一方、撮像装置には先幕と後幕をともに機械的に行うシャッターが用いられたものがあり、この場合には先幕の駆動機構と後幕の駆動機構の双方の駆動機構が必要になり、撮像装置の大型化や部品点数の増大を来すおそれがある。 Some imaging devices use an electronic shutter that electronically performs both the front curtain and the rear curtain. In this case, the front curtain is performed by clearing (resetting) the electric charge, and the rear curtain is performed by continuous reading. .. However, in the case of an electronic shutter, since the speed is controlled by the reading speed of the sensor, there is a possibility that a problem called rolling shutter distortion occurs in which an image of a moving subject is distorted. On the other hand, some imaging devices use a shutter that mechanically performs both the front curtain and the rear curtain. In this case, both the drive mechanism of the front curtain and the drive mechanism of the rear curtain are required. , There is a risk that the size of the image pickup device will increase and the number of parts will increase.
 そこで、撮像装置1のように電子幕と開閉羽根15の組み合わせによる電子先幕シャッターの構成にすることにより、撮像装置1の大型化や部品点数の増大を抑制した上でローリングシャッター歪みの発生を抑制することが可能になる。 Therefore, by configuring the electronic front curtain shutter by combining the electronic curtain and the opening / closing blade 15 like the image pickup device 1, the large size of the image pickup device 1 and the increase in the number of parts are suppressed, and the rolling shutter distortion is generated. It becomes possible to suppress.
 尚、上記には、磁気駆動部27の駆動力と走行バネ40の駆動力の双方の駆動力によって開閉羽根15を開放位置から閉塞位置まで動作させる例を示したが、コイル31への通電を行わず走行バネ40の付勢力によって発生する駆動力のみによって開閉羽根15を開放位置から閉塞位置まで動作させることも可能である。 In the above, an example in which the opening / closing blade 15 is operated from the open position to the closed position by both the driving force of the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force of the traveling spring 40 is shown, but the coil 31 is energized. It is also possible to operate the opening / closing blade 15 from the open position to the closed position only by the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40.
 この場合に、開閉羽根15の走行速度は磁気駆動部27の駆動力と走行バネ40の駆動力の双方の駆動力によって開閉羽根15を動作させる場合よりも低速になるが、コイル31に通電を行わない分、消費電力の低減を図ることができる。
In this case, the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is lower than the case where the opening / closing blade 15 is operated by both the driving force of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the driving force of the traveling spring 40, but the coil 31 is energized. Power consumption can be reduced as much as it is not performed.
[1-4.まとめ]

 上記の通り、撮像装置1及び羽根開閉装置11にあっては、コイル31への通電に伴って回転されるマグネット32とマグネット32の回転に伴って回転されるローターギヤ33とを有する磁気駆動部27と、ローターギヤ33に噛合される駆動ギヤ35を有する駆動体34と、駆動体34を介して開閉羽根15に開閉方向における一方への付勢力を付与する走行バネ40とを備え、開閉羽根15が駆動体34の回動動作に伴って開閉方向へ動作される。
[1-4. Summary]

As described above, in the image pickup device 1 and the blade opening / closing device 11, a magnetic drive unit having a magnet 32 that is rotated by energizing the coil 31 and a rotor gear 33 that is rotated by the rotation of the magnet 32. 27, a drive body 34 having a drive gear 35 meshed with the rotor gear 33, and a traveling spring 40 for applying an urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34. 15 is operated in the opening / closing direction as the drive body 34 rotates.
 従って、コイル31への通電に伴って発生する磁気駆動部27の駆動力と駆動体34における走行バネ40の付勢力とによって開閉羽根15の開閉動作を行うことが可能になり、磁気駆動部27において発生する駆動力を小さくして開閉羽根15の開閉動作を行うことができ、磁気駆動部27の大型化や消費電力の増大を伴うことなく開閉羽根15の走行速度の高速化を図ることができる。 Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 can be performed by the driving force of the magnetic driving unit 27 generated by energizing the coil 31 and the urging force of the traveling spring 40 in the driving body 34, and the magnetic driving unit 27 can be opened / closed. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 can be performed by reducing the driving force generated in the above, and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 can be increased without increasing the size of the magnetic drive unit 27 and increasing the power consumption. it can.
 また、磁気駆動部27と駆動体34が開閉羽根15の開閉方向と同じ方向、即ち、光軸方向に直交する方向において並んで配置されている。 Further, the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are arranged side by side in the same direction as the opening / closing direction of the opening / closing blade 15, that is, in the direction orthogonal to the optical axis direction.
 従って、磁気駆動部27と駆動体34が開口13aを通過する光の進行方向に並ばない配置にされるため、光の進行方向における撮像装置1及び羽根開閉装置11の小型化を図ることができる。 Therefore, since the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are arranged so as not to line up in the traveling direction of the light passing through the opening 13a, it is possible to reduce the size of the image pickup device 1 and the blade opening / closing device 11 in the traveling direction of the light. ..
 さらに、駆動体34に回動支点部として機能する被支持軸部37が設けられ、走行バネ40として捩じりコイルバネが用いられ、走行バネ40が被支持軸部37に支持されている。 Further, the drive body 34 is provided with a supported shaft portion 37 that functions as a rotation fulcrum portion, a torsion coil spring is used as the traveling spring 40, and the traveling spring 40 is supported by the supported shaft portion 37.
 従って、走行バネ40の配置スペースが小さいと共に開閉羽根15に付与される付勢力を大きくすることが可能になるため、駆動体34の小型化を図ることができると共に磁気駆動部27を小型化してエネルギー効率の向上を図ることができる。 Therefore, since the arrangement space of the traveling spring 40 is small and the urging force applied to the opening / closing blade 15 can be increased, the drive body 34 can be miniaturized and the magnetic drive unit 27 can be miniaturized. Energy efficiency can be improved.
 さらにまた、ロック部53bを有しロック位置と非ロック位置の間で動作されるロック部材43が設けられ、駆動体34に被ロック部36cが形成され、ロック位置において走行バネ40の付勢力により被ロック部36cがロック部53bに押し付けられることにより駆動体34がロック部材43にロックされる。 Furthermore, a locking member 43 having a locking portion 53b and operating between a locked position and a non-locking position is provided, a locked portion 36c is formed on the drive body 34, and the urging force of the traveling spring 40 at the locked position The drive body 34 is locked to the lock member 43 by pressing the locked portion 36c against the lock portion 53b.
 従って、走行バネ40の付勢力によって被ロック部36cがロック部53bに押し付けられることにより開閉羽根15の開閉動作の開始前の駆動体34における初期位置が定まるため、駆動体34の初期位置が安定し、開閉羽根15の安定した開閉動作を確保することができる。 Therefore, the locked portion 36c is pressed against the lock portion 53b by the urging force of the traveling spring 40, so that the initial position of the drive body 34 before the start of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 is determined, so that the initial position of the driving body 34 is stable. Therefore, stable opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 can be ensured.
 このように羽根開閉装置11にあっては、マグネット32と駆動体34の初期位置が、走行バネ40の付勢力によって駆動体34の被ロック部36cがロック部材43のロック部53bに押し付けられることにより定められている。 In this way, in the blade opening / closing device 11, the initial positions of the magnet 32 and the drive body 34 are such that the locked portion 36c of the drive body 34 is pressed against the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43 by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. Is defined by.
 一方、磁力によってマグネット32が第1のヨーク29に引き寄せられることにより、マグネット32と駆動体34の初期位置が定められる構成にすることも可能であるが、この構成の場合には、マグネット32と駆動体34の初期位置がマグネット32の着磁方向や第1のヨーク29の形状に大きな影響を受ける。 On the other hand, it is possible to have a configuration in which the initial positions of the magnet 32 and the drive body 34 are determined by attracting the magnet 32 to the first yoke 29 by magnetic force, but in the case of this configuration, the magnet 32 and The initial position of the drive body 34 is greatly affected by the magnetizing direction of the magnet 32 and the shape of the first yoke 29.
 従って、上記のように、走行バネ40の付勢力によって駆動体34の被ロック部36cがロック部材43のロック部53bに押し付けられることによりマグネット32と駆動体34の初期位置を定める構成にすることにより、マグネット32の着磁方向や第1のヨーク29の形状がマグネット32と駆動体34の初期位置に影響を及ぼすことがない。これにより、マグネット32と駆動体34の初期位置に関する高い位置精度が確保され、開閉羽根15の開閉動作に関する駆動機構17の安定した性能を確保することができる。 Therefore, as described above, the locked portion 36c of the drive body 34 is pressed against the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43 by the urging force of the traveling spring 40 to determine the initial positions of the magnet 32 and the drive body 34. Therefore, the magnetizing direction of the magnet 32 and the shape of the first yoke 29 do not affect the initial positions of the magnet 32 and the drive body 34. As a result, high positional accuracy regarding the initial positions of the magnet 32 and the drive body 34 can be ensured, and stable performance of the drive mechanism 17 regarding the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 can be ensured.
 また、ロック保持位置とロック解除位置の間で動作されロック部材43をロック位置と非ロック位置の間で動作させるロック解除体42と、吸着することによりロック解除体42をロック保持位置に保持する電磁石56と、ロック解除体42をロック解除位置へ向けて付勢するロック解除バネ51とが設けられている。 Further, the unlocking body 42, which is operated between the lock holding position and the unlocking position and operates the lock member 43 between the locked position and the unlocked position, and the unlocking body 42 are held at the lock holding position by being attracted to each other. An electromagnet 56 and an unlocking spring 51 that urges the unlocking body 42 toward the unlocking position are provided.
 従って、電磁石56によってロック解除体42がロック保持位置に保持され、電磁石56のロック解除体42への作用を解除することによりロック解除体42がロック解除バネ51の付勢力によってロック保持位置からロック解除位置へ向けて動作させることが可能になり、ロック解除体42のロック保持位置とロック解除位置の間での動作を簡素な機構により確実に行うことができる。 Therefore, the unlocking body 42 is held in the lock holding position by the electromagnet 56, and the unlocking body 42 is locked from the lock holding position by the urging force of the unlocking spring 51 by releasing the action of the electromagnet 56 on the unlocking body 42. It becomes possible to operate toward the release position, and the operation between the lock holding position and the unlock position of the unlock body 42 can be reliably performed by a simple mechanism.
 さらに、駆動体34の所定の回動範囲において駆動体34の回動速度を回動端に近付くに従って低減するブレーキレバー59が設けられている。 Further, a brake lever 59 is provided to reduce the rotation speed of the drive body 34 as it approaches the rotation end in a predetermined rotation range of the drive body 34.
 従って、回動速度が回動端に近付くに従って低減されて駆動体34の回動が停止されるため、駆動体34の急減速及び駆動体34からの各部への衝撃が抑制され、駆動体34及び駆動体34が接する各部の耐久性の向上を図ることができる。 Therefore, as the rotation speed approaches the rotation end, the rotation of the drive body 34 is stopped, so that the sudden deceleration of the drive body 34 and the impact from the drive body 34 to each part are suppressed, and the drive body 34 is suppressed. And the durability of each part in contact with the drive body 34 can be improved.
 さらにまた、ブレーキレバー59が回動可能にされ、ブレーキレバー59に駆動体34によって押圧されるブレーキアーム60とロック解除体42を押圧する作用アーム61とが設けられ、駆動体34によるブレーキアーム60の押圧時に作用アーム61によってロック解除体42が押圧されることによりロック解除体42がロック解除位置からロック保持位置へ向けて動作される共にロック部材43が非ロック位置からロック位置へ向けて動作される。 Furthermore, the brake lever 59 is made rotatable, and the brake lever 59 is provided with a brake arm 60 pressed by the drive body 34 and an action arm 61 for pressing the unlocked body 42, and the brake arm 60 by the drive body 34 is provided. When the lock release body 42 is pressed by the action arm 61, the unlock body 42 is operated from the unlock position to the lock holding position, and the lock member 43 is operated from the unlock position to the lock position. Will be done.
 従って、ブレーキレバー59によって駆動体34の減速とロック解除体42のロック解除位置からロック保持位置へ向けての動作とが行われるため、駆動体34の減速とロック解除体42の動作とを行うための各別の機構を設ける必要がなく、構造の簡素化及び動作の迅速化を図ることができる。 Therefore, the brake lever 59 decelerates the drive body 34 and operates the unlocked body 42 from the unlocked position to the lock holding position. Therefore, the brake lever 59 decelerates the drive body 34 and operates the unlocked body 42. It is not necessary to provide a separate mechanism for each, and the structure can be simplified and the operation can be speeded up.
 撮像装置1及び羽根開閉装置11にあっては、第1の回動位置から第2の回動位置へ向けて回動されるときに駆動体34の回動速度を低減するブレーキレバー59と、ロック位置において駆動体34をロックするロック部材43と、駆動体34のロックが解除されたときにロック部材43をロック位置から非ロック位置へ向けて動作させるロック解除バネ51とを備え、ロック部材43にブレーキレバー59の回動力が付与されることによりロック部材43が非ロック位置からロック位置へ向けて動作される。 In the image pickup device 1 and the blade opening / closing device 11, a brake lever 59 that reduces the rotation speed of the drive body 34 when the image pickup device 1 and the blade opening / closing device 11 are rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, and a brake lever 59. The lock member 43 includes a lock member 43 that locks the drive body 34 at the lock position, and an unlock spring 51 that operates the lock member 43 from the lock position to the unlocked position when the drive body 34 is unlocked. By applying the rotational force of the brake lever 59 to the 43, the lock member 43 is operated from the unlocked position to the locked position.
 従って、ブレーキレバー59によって駆動体34の回動速度が低減されている状態においてロック部材43にブレーキレバー59の回動力が付与されてロック部材43が非ロック位置からロック位置へ向けて動作される。これにより、ロック部材43の非ロック位置からロック位置へ向けての動作がロック解除バネ51の付勢力により回動される駆動体34の回動中に行われるため、消費電力を低減した上でロック部材43の非ロック位置からロック位置までの復帰動作の時間の短縮化を図ることができる。 Therefore, in a state where the rotation speed of the drive body 34 is reduced by the brake lever 59, the rotational power of the brake lever 59 is applied to the lock member 43, and the lock member 43 is operated from the unlocked position to the locked position. .. As a result, the operation of the lock member 43 from the non-locked position to the locked position is performed during the rotation of the drive body 34, which is rotated by the urging force of the unlock spring 51, so that the power consumption is reduced. It is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the lock member 43 from the non-locked position to the locked position.
 また、ロック部材43にブレーキレバー59の回動力が付与されている状態において駆動体34の回動がブレーキレバー59によって規制されて回動速度が低減されるため、駆動体34に対して回動を規制する方向への力がロック部材43からブレーキレバー59を介して付与される。 Further, in a state where the rotational power of the brake lever 59 is applied to the lock member 43, the rotation of the drive body 34 is regulated by the brake lever 59 and the rotation speed is reduced, so that the drive body 34 rotates with respect to the drive body 34. A force is applied from the lock member 43 to the brake lever 59 in the direction of restricting the speed.
 従って、駆動体34の回動がブレーキレバー59から付与される力に加えロック部材43から付与される力によっても行われるため、駆動体34の減速効果が大きく、駆動体34の減速を効率的かつ迅速に行うことができる。 Therefore, since the rotation of the drive body 34 is performed not only by the force applied by the brake lever 59 but also by the force applied by the lock member 43, the deceleration effect of the drive body 34 is large and the deceleration of the drive body 34 is efficient. And it can be done quickly.
 さらに、駆動電流が供給されるコイル31とコイル31への通電に伴って回転されるマグネット32とを有する磁気駆動部27が設けられ、駆動体34又は磁気駆動部27の少なくとも一方の駆動力によって開閉羽根15が動作される。 Further, a magnetic drive unit 27 having a coil 31 to which a drive current is supplied and a magnet 32 that is rotated by energizing the coil 31 is provided, and is driven by at least one of the drive body 34 or the magnetic drive unit 27. The opening / closing blade 15 is operated.
 従って、開閉羽根15が磁気駆動部27と駆動体34の少なくとも一方の駆動力によって開閉方向へ動作されるため、開閉羽根15の動作制御に関する自由度が向上し、開閉羽根15の速度を撮影態様等に応じて容易に変更することができる。 Therefore, since the opening / closing blade 15 is operated in the opening / closing direction by the driving force of at least one of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the driving body 34, the degree of freedom regarding the operation control of the opening / closing blade 15 is improved, and the speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is photographed. It can be easily changed according to the above.
 さらにまた、磁気駆動部27にマグネット32の回転に伴って回転されるローターギヤ33が設けられ、駆動体34にはローターギヤ33に噛合される駆動ギヤ35が設けられ、駆動体34を介して開閉羽根15に開閉方向における一方への付勢力を付与する走行バネ40が設けられている。 Furthermore, the magnetic drive unit 27 is provided with a rotor gear 33 that is rotated with the rotation of the magnet 32, and the drive body 34 is provided with a drive gear 35 that is meshed with the rotor gear 33, via the drive body 34. The opening / closing blade 15 is provided with a traveling spring 40 that applies an urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction.
 従って、磁気駆動部27におけるマグネット32の回転により発生する駆動力と走行バネ40の付勢力による駆動力とによって開閉羽根15を開閉方向における一方へ動作させることが可能になるため、磁気駆動部27の大型化や消費電力の増大を伴うことなく開閉羽根15の走行速度の高速化を図ることができる。
Therefore, the opening / closing blade 15 can be operated in one direction in the opening / closing direction by the driving force generated by the rotation of the magnet 32 in the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is possible to increase the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 without increasing the size and power consumption of the magnet.
[1-5.変形例]

 以下に、ロック動作ユニットの変形例について説明する(図19乃至図26参照)。尚、以下に示す変形例に係るロック動作ユニット41Aは上記したロック動作ユニット41と比較して、主に、解除ベースが二つの部材によって構成されていることが相違する。従って、以下の変形例に係るロック動作ユニット41Aに関しては、ロック動作ユニット41と比較して異なる部分についてのみ詳細に説明をし、その他の部分についてはロック動作ユニット41における同様の部分に付した符号と同じ符号を付して説明は省略する。
[1-5. Modification example]

An example of modification of the lock operation unit will be described below (see FIGS. 19 to 26). The lock operation unit 41A according to the modification shown below is different from the lock operation unit 41 described above in that the release base is mainly composed of two members. Therefore, regarding the lock operation unit 41A according to the following modification, only the parts different from the lock operation unit 41 will be described in detail, and the other parts will be described with reference numerals to the same parts in the lock operation unit 41. The same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.
 ロック動作ユニット41Aはロック解除体42Aとロック部材43を有している(図19及び図20参照)。 The locking operation unit 41A has an unlocking body 42A and a locking member 43 (see FIGS. 19 and 20).
 ロック解除体42Aは解除ベース44Aと吸着片45を有し、解除ベース44Aは保持レバー71と解除アーム72によって構成されている。保持レバー71と解除アーム72は同軸を支点としてそれぞれロック保持位置とロック解除位置の間で各別に回動可能にされている。 The unlocking body 42A has an unlocking base 44A and a suction piece 45, and the unlocking base 44A is composed of a holding lever 71 and an unlocking arm 72. The holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are respectively rotatable separately between the lock holding position and the unlocking position with the coaxial as a fulcrum.
 保持レバー71は略上下方向を向く板状のベース面部73とベース面部73に対して上方に折り曲げられた第1の支持面部74とを有している。第1の支持面部74の一部はベース面部73から側方に突出された第1のバネ受け部74aとして設けられている。 The holding lever 71 has a plate-shaped base surface portion 73 that faces substantially in the vertical direction and a first support surface portion 74 that is bent upward with respect to the base surface portion 73. A part of the first support surface portion 74 is provided as a first spring receiving portion 74a protruding laterally from the base surface portion 73.
 第1のバネ受け部74aには略円筒状の第1のバネ支持部材75が取り付けられている。第1のバネ支持部材75には第1のバネ受け部74aの前側において戻しバネ76が支持されている。戻しバネ76の一端部は第1の支持面部74に係合されている。 A substantially cylindrical first spring support member 75 is attached to the first spring receiving portion 74a. A return spring 76 is supported by the first spring support member 75 on the front side of the first spring receiving portion 74a. One end of the return spring 76 is engaged with the first support surface portion 74.
 吸着片45はベース面部73に固定され、ベース面部73の左右方向における一端部の上面側に位置されている。 The suction piece 45 is fixed to the base surface portion 73 and is located on the upper surface side of one end portion in the left-right direction of the base surface portion 73.
 解除アーム72は前後方向を向く第2の支持面部77と第2の支持面部77に対して後方に折り曲げられたバネ掛け面部78とバネ掛け面部78に対して第2の支持面部77側に折り曲げられた押さえ面部79とを有している。 The release arm 72 is bent rearward with respect to the second support surface portion 77 and the second support surface portion 77 facing in the front-rear direction toward the second support surface portion 77 with respect to the spring hooking surface portion 78 and the spring hooking surface portion 78. It has a pressed holding surface portion 79.
 第2の支持面部77は保持レバー71の第1の支持面部74と前後で対向して位置され、第2の支持面部77が第1の支持面部74の前方に位置されている。第2の支持面部77の一部は保持レバー71の第1のバネ受け部74aと前後で対向して位置された第2のバネ受け部77aとして設けられている。第2の支持面部77の他の一部はベース面部73よりも側方における第2のバネ受け部77aと反対方向に突出され、この突出された部分が解除受け部77bとして設けられている。第2の支持面部77には下方に突出された規制突部77cが設けられている。 The second support surface portion 77 is positioned so as to face the first support surface portion 74 of the holding lever 71 in the front-rear direction, and the second support surface portion 77 is located in front of the first support surface portion 74. A part of the second support surface portion 77 is provided as a second spring receiving portion 77a located so as to face the first spring receiving portion 74a of the holding lever 71 in the front-rear direction. The other part of the second support surface portion 77 is projected in the direction opposite to the second spring receiving portion 77a on the side of the base surface portion 73, and this protruding portion is provided as the release receiving portion 77b. The second support surface portion 77 is provided with a regulating protrusion 77c protruding downward.
 バネ掛け面部78には戻しバネ76の他端部が係合されている。従って、戻しバネ76の両端部がそれぞれ第1の支持面部74とバネ掛け面部78に係合され、戻しバネ76によって保持レバー71と解除アーム72にベース面部73と押さえ面部79が互いに近付く方向への付勢力が付与される。これにより保持レバー71と解除アーム72に戻しバネ76の付勢力に反する方向への力が付与されていない状態において、ベース面部73に押さえ面部79が突き当てられた状態にされている。 The other end of the return spring 76 is engaged with the spring hooking surface 78. Therefore, both ends of the return spring 76 are engaged with the first support surface portion 74 and the spring hooking surface portion 78, respectively, and the return spring 76 brings the base surface portion 73 and the pressing surface portion 79 closer to the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72. Is given the urging power of. As a result, the pressing surface portion 79 is abutted against the base surface portion 73 in a state in which the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are not subjected to a force in a direction opposite to the urging force of the return spring 76.
 第2のバネ受け部77aには略円筒状の第2のバネ支持部材80が取り付けられている。第2のバネ支持部材80と第1のバネ支持部材75は第1のバネ受け部74aと第2のバネ受け部77aの間で結合されている。 A substantially cylindrical second spring support member 80 is attached to the second spring receiving portion 77a. The second spring support member 80 and the first spring support member 75 are coupled between the first spring receiving portion 74a and the second spring receiving portion 77a.
 第2のバネ支持部材80には第2のバネ受け部77aの後側においてロック解除バネ81が支持されている。ロック解除バネ81は、例えば、捩じりコイルバネであり、一端部が配置ベース20に取り付けられたバネ支持シャフト21に係合され他端部が第2の支持面部77に係合されている。ロック解除バネ81のバネ力は戻しバネ76のバネ力より大きくされている。 The unlocking spring 81 is supported on the rear side of the second spring receiving portion 77a on the second spring supporting member 80. The unlocking spring 81 is, for example, a torsion coil spring, one end of which is engaged with a spring support shaft 21 attached to the arrangement base 20, and the other end of which is engaged with a second support surface portion 77. The spring force of the unlock spring 81 is larger than the spring force of the return spring 76.
 ロック部材43は解除アーム72の前側において第2の支持面部77に対向して位置された被支持板部53と被支持板部53に対して直交し解除アーム72の下側においてベース面部73の前端部に対向して位置された被押圧板部54とを有している。 The lock member 43 is orthogonal to the supported plate portion 53 and the supported plate portion 53 located on the front side of the release arm 72 facing the second support surface portion 77, and the base surface portion 73 is located on the lower side of the release arm 72. It has a pressed plate portion 54 positioned so as to face the front end portion.
 ロック部材43の被支持板部53には略円筒状の第3のバネ支持部材82が取り付けられている。 A substantially cylindrical third spring support member 82 is attached to the supported plate portion 53 of the lock member 43.
 第3のバネ支持部材82には第2のバネ受け部77aの前側においてロックバネ55が支持されている。ロックバネ55のバネ力はロック解除バネ81のバネ力より小さくされている。ロックバネ55は一端部が配置ベース20に取り付けられたバネ支持シャフト21に係合され他端部がロック部材43の被支持板部53に係合されている。 The lock spring 55 is supported on the front side of the second spring receiving portion 77a by the third spring supporting member 82. The spring force of the lock spring 55 is smaller than the spring force of the unlock spring 81. One end of the lock spring 55 is engaged with the spring support shaft 21 attached to the arrangement base 20, and the other end is engaged with the supported plate portion 53 of the lock member 43.
 ロック動作ユニット41Aは配置ベース20に取り付けられたロックシャフト24がロック部材43の軸挿通孔53aと第1のバネ支持部材75と第2のバネ支持部材80と第3のバネ支持部材82に挿入されることによりロックシャフト24に支持され、ロックシャフト24を支点として保持レバー71と解除アーム72とロック部材43が各別に回動可能にされている。 In the lock operation unit 41A, the lock shaft 24 attached to the arrangement base 20 is inserted into the shaft insertion hole 53a of the lock member 43, the first spring support member 75, the second spring support member 80, and the third spring support member 82. By being supported by the lock shaft 24, the holding lever 71, the release arm 72, and the lock member 43 can be rotated separately with the lock shaft 24 as a fulcrum.
 ロック動作ユニット41Aがロックシャフト24を支点として回動可能にされた状態において、解除アーム72はロック解除バネ81によって押さえ面部79が保持レバー71のベース面部73に接する方向へ付勢され、保持レバー71はロック解除バネ81の付勢力が解除アーム72を介して付与されることにより解除アーム72と同じ方向へ付勢されている。従って、保持レバー71と解除アーム72はロック解除バネ81の付勢力が付与される方向へ一体になって回動可能にされている。また、保持レバー71は戻しバネ76によってベース面部73が解除アーム72の押さえ面部79に近付く方向へ付勢され、保持レバー71の戻しバネ76による付勢方向が保持レバー71に対するロック解除バネ81の付勢方向と反対方向にされている。 In a state where the lock operation unit 41A is rotatable around the lock shaft 24 as a fulcrum, the release arm 72 is urged by the lock release spring 81 in a direction in which the pressing surface portion 79 contacts the base surface portion 73 of the holding lever 71, and the holding lever 72. The 71 is urged in the same direction as the release arm 72 by applying the urging force of the unlock spring 81 via the release arm 72. Therefore, the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are integrally rotatable in the direction in which the urging force of the lock release spring 81 is applied. Further, the holding lever 71 is urged by the return spring 76 in the direction in which the base surface portion 73 approaches the holding surface portion 79 of the release arm 72, and the urging direction of the holding lever 71 by the return spring 76 is the lock release spring 81 with respect to the holding lever 71. It is in the opposite direction to the urging direction.
 ロック部材43はロックバネ55によって被押圧板部54がベース面部73に近付く方向へ付勢される。従って、ロック解除バネ81とロックバネ55の付勢方向はロック動作ユニット41Aの回動方向において反対方向にされており、ロック解除体42Aとロック部材43に回動方向において付勢力以外の力が付与されていない状態においては、ロック解除体42Aの規制突部77cにロック部材43の被押圧板部54が押し付けられた状態でロック解除体42Aとロック部材43が保持される。
The lock member 43 is urged by the lock spring 55 in a direction in which the pressed plate portion 54 approaches the base surface portion 73. Therefore, the urging directions of the lock release spring 81 and the lock spring 55 are opposite to each other in the rotation direction of the lock operation unit 41A, and a force other than the urging force is applied to the lock release body 42A and the lock member 43 in the rotation direction. In the non-locking state, the unlocking body 42A and the locking member 43 are held in a state where the pressed plate portion 54 of the locking member 43 is pressed against the regulating protrusion 77c of the unlocking body 42A.
[1-6.変形例に係るロック動作ユニットが用いられた羽根開閉装置の動作]

 以下に、変形例に係るロック動作ユニット41Aが用いられた羽根開閉装置11における動作について説明する(図21乃至図26参照)。
[1-6. Operation of the blade switchgear using the lock operation unit according to the modified example]

The operation of the blade opening / closing device 11 in which the lock operation unit 41A according to the modified example is used will be described below (see FIGS. 21 to 26).
 先ず、駆動機構17における各部の初期状態について説明する(図21参照)。 First, the initial state of each part of the drive mechanism 17 will be described (see FIG. 21).
 撮像装置1の電源釦6が操作される前の初期状態においては、コイル31に通電が行われておらず磁気駆動部27に駆動力が発生しておらずマグネット32の回転が停止された状態にされている。 In the initial state before the power button 6 of the image pickup apparatus 1 is operated, the coil 31 is not energized, the magnetic drive unit 27 is not generating a driving force, and the rotation of the magnet 32 is stopped. Has been made.
 初期状態において、電磁石56には通電が行われておらず、磁力発生部57に磁力が発生している。従って、磁力発生部57によって吸着片45が引き寄せられ、吸着部57a、57aによって吸着片45が吸着されている。従って、ロック解除体42Aの保持レバー71と解除アーム72がともにロック保持位置に保持されている。 In the initial state, the electromagnet 56 is not energized, and a magnetic force is generated in the magnetic force generating portion 57. Therefore, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the magnetic force generating portion 57, and the suction piece 45 is attracted by the suction portions 57a and 57a. Therefore, both the holding lever 71 and the releasing arm 72 of the unlocking body 42A are held at the locking holding position.
 このときロック部材43にはロックバネ55により被押圧部板54がベース面部73に近付く方向への付勢力が付与されており、被押圧板部54が解除アーム72の規制突部77cに押し当てられてロック部材43がロック位置に保持されている。 At this time, the lock member 43 is given an urging force in the direction in which the pressed portion plate 54 approaches the base surface portion 73 by the lock spring 55, and the pressed plate portion 54 is pressed against the regulation protrusion 77c of the release arm 72. The lock member 43 is held in the locked position.
 ロック部材43がロック位置に保持されている状態において、駆動体34における駆動レバー36の被ロック部36cがロック部材43のロック部53bに係合され、駆動体34は走行バネ40の付勢力に反して回動が規制されロック状態にされ第1の回動端に保持されている。従って、走行バネ40の付勢力によって発生する駆動力が駆動体34から開閉羽根15に伝達されていない状態にあり、例えば、開閉羽根15が開放位置に保持されている。 In a state where the lock member 43 is held in the locked position, the locked portion 36c of the drive lever 36 in the drive body 34 is engaged with the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43, and the drive body 34 exerts an urging force on the traveling spring 40. On the contrary, the rotation is restricted and locked, and the rotation is held at the first rotation end. Therefore, the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40 is not transmitted from the driving body 34 to the opening / closing blade 15, for example, the opening / closing blade 15 is held in the open position.
 このとき撮像素子12は電子幕(先幕)によって光が入射されない閉塞状態(非露光状態)にされている。 At this time, the image sensor 12 is in a closed state (non-exposure state) in which light is not incident by the electronic curtain (front curtain).
 初期状態において、ブレーキレバー59は減速開始位置に保持されており、ブレーキアーム60が駆動体34の駆動レバー36から離隔され、作用アーム61に取り付けられた押圧軸62が解除アーム72における第2の支持面部77の解除受け部77bから離隔されている。 In the initial state, the brake lever 59 is held at the deceleration start position, the brake arm 60 is separated from the drive lever 36 of the drive body 34, and the pressing shaft 62 attached to the action arm 61 is the second release arm 72. It is separated from the release receiving portion 77b of the support surface portion 77.
 上記した初期状態において、電磁石56に対する通電が行われると、開閉羽根15の開閉動作が開始される(図22参照)。開閉羽根15の開閉動作と同時に電子幕の制御も開始される。 In the above-mentioned initial state, when the electromagnet 56 is energized, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15 is started (see FIG. 22). The control of the electronic curtain is also started at the same time as the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing blade 15.
 電磁石56に対する通電が行われると、開閉羽根15の開放位置から閉塞位置へ向けての動作が開始される。開閉羽根15の開放位置から閉塞位置へ向けての動作が行われるときには、電子幕と開閉羽根15の間にスリットが形成される状態で開閉羽根15の動作速度に応じて電子幕が制御され、形成されるスリットを介して撮像素子12に光が入射されて露光が行われる。 When the electromagnet 56 is energized, the operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the open position to the closed position is started. When the operation from the open position to the closed position of the opening / closing blade 15 is performed, the electronic curtain is controlled according to the operating speed of the opening / closing blade 15 in a state where a slit is formed between the electronic curtain and the opening / closing blade 15. Light is incident on the image pickup device 12 through the formed slit to perform exposure.
 電磁石56に対する通電が行われると、磁力発生部57に発生していた磁力が消失し、吸着部57a、57aによる吸着片45の吸着が解除される。従って、保持レバー71と解除アーム72が一体になってロック解除バネ81の付勢力によってロック保持位置からロック解除位置へ向けて回動されていく。 When the electromagnet 56 is energized, the magnetic force generated in the magnetic force generating unit 57 disappears, and the suction pieces 45 are released from being attracted by the suction parts 57a and 57a. Therefore, the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are integrally rotated by the urging force of the lock release spring 81 from the lock holding position to the lock release position.
 保持レバー71と解除アーム72がロック保持位置からロック解除位置へ向けて回動されていくと、解除アーム72の規制突部77cによってロック部材43の被押圧板部54が押圧され、駆動体34における被ロック部36cのロック部材43のロック部53bに対する係合が解除される。従って、ロック部材43がロックバネ55の付勢力に反して保持レバー71と解除アーム72によって構成されたロック解除体42Aと一体になってロック位置から非ロック位置へ向けて回動されていく。 When the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are rotated from the lock holding position to the lock release position, the pressure plate portion 54 of the lock member 43 is pressed by the regulation protrusion 77c of the release arm 72, and the drive body 34 The engagement of the lock member 43 of the locked portion 36c with respect to the lock portion 53b is released. Therefore, the lock member 43 is integrally rotated with the unlocking body 42A composed of the holding lever 71 and the unlocking arm 72 against the urging force of the lock spring 55 from the locked position to the unlocked position.
 ロック解除位置へ向けて回動された保持レバー71と解除アーム72は、何れかの一部が配置ベース20に取り付けられ又は配置ベース20に形成された図示しない回動規制部に接して回動が停止されロック解除位置に保持される。同時に、非ロック位置へ向けてロック解除体42Aと一体になって回動されたロック部材43は、ロック解除体42Aに伴って回動が停止され非ロック位置に保持される。 The holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 that have been rotated toward the unlocked position rotate in contact with a rotation restricting portion (not shown) that is partially attached to the arrangement base 20 or formed on the arrangement base 20. Is stopped and held in the unlocked position. At the same time, the lock member 43 that has been rotated integrally with the unlocked body 42A toward the unlocked position is stopped rotating along with the unlocked body 42A and is held in the unlocked position.
 一方、駆動体34の被ロック部36cとロック部材43のロック部53bとの係合が解除されると、走行バネ40の付勢力によって駆動体34が第1の回動端から第2の回動端へ向けて回動され、走行バネ40の付勢力によって発生する駆動力が駆動体34を介して開閉羽根15に伝達され開閉羽根15が駆動体34の回動に伴って開放位置から閉塞位置へ向けて動作される。 On the other hand, when the locked portion 36c of the drive body 34 and the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43 are disengaged, the drive body 34 is rotated from the first rotation end to the second rotation by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated toward the moving end, and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40 is transmitted to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34, and the opening / closing blade 15 is closed from the open position as the driving body 34 rotates. It is operated toward the position.
 このとき電磁石56に対する通電と同時に磁気駆動部27のコイル31に対する通電が行われ、ローターとして機能するマグネット32とローターギヤ33とが一体になって駆動体34と反対方向へ回転され、磁気駆動部27において発生した駆動力がローターギヤ33から駆動体34を介して開閉羽根15に伝達される。従って、開閉羽根15は磁気駆動部27において発生する駆動力と走行バネ40の付勢力によって発生する駆動力との双方の駆動力によって動作され、開放位置から閉塞位置へ向けて高速で動作される。 At this time, the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 is energized at the same time as the electromagnet 56 is energized, and the magnet 32 functioning as a rotor and the rotor gear 33 are integrally rotated in the direction opposite to the drive body 34, and the magnetic drive unit is energized. The driving force generated in 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34. Therefore, the opening / closing blade 15 is operated by both the driving force generated by the magnetic driving unit 27 and the driving force generated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40, and is operated at high speed from the open position to the closed position. ..
 引き続き、コイル31に対する通電が行われ、開閉羽根15がさらに閉塞位置へ向けての動作される(図23参照)。 Subsequently, the coil 31 is energized, and the opening / closing blade 15 is further operated toward the closed position (see FIG. 23).
 磁気駆動部27と駆動体34は引き続き同期して反対方向へ回動され、駆動体34が走行バネ40の付勢力によって第2の回動端へ向けてさらに回動される。第2の回動端へ向けてさらに回動された駆動体34は駆動レバー36に取り付けられた連結軸38が減速開始位置に保持されているブレーキレバー59のブレーキアーム60に接触され、ブレーキレバー59が連結軸38に押圧され摩擦力に反して減速開始位置から回動停止位置へ向けて回動されていく。従って、駆動体34はブレーキレバー59によって回動速度が第2の回動端に近付くに従って次第に低下されていき、開閉羽根15の動作速度も閉塞位置に近付くに従って次第に低下されていく。 The magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are continuously rotated in opposite directions in synchronization with each other, and the drive body 34 is further rotated toward the second rotation end by the urging force of the traveling spring 40. The drive body 34 further rotated toward the second rotation end is brought into contact with the brake arm 60 of the brake lever 59 whose connecting shaft 38 attached to the drive lever 36 is held at the deceleration start position, and the brake lever 59 is pressed against the connecting shaft 38 and is rotated from the deceleration start position to the rotation stop position against the frictional force. Therefore, the rotation speed of the drive body 34 is gradually reduced by the brake lever 59 as it approaches the second rotation end, and the operating speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is also gradually reduced as it approaches the closed position.
 このときブレーキレバー59の回動により押圧軸62が解除アーム72の解除受け部77bに接触される。ブレーキレバー59の押圧軸62が解除アーム72の解除受け部77bに接触されたときには、電磁石56に対する通電が停止される。従って、再び磁力発生部57に磁力が発生する。 At this time, the pressing shaft 62 is brought into contact with the release receiving portion 77b of the release arm 72 by the rotation of the brake lever 59. When the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59 comes into contact with the release receiving portion 77b of the release arm 72, the energization of the electromagnet 56 is stopped. Therefore, the magnetic force is generated again in the magnetic force generating unit 57.
 さらに磁気駆動部27と駆動体34は同期して反対方向へ回動され、ブレーキレバー59が連結軸38に押圧されて引き続き回動され、ブレーキアーム60が配置ベース20に取り付けられたストッパー26に接してブレーキレバー59の回動が停止される(図24参照)。 Further, the magnetic drive unit 27 and the drive body 34 are synchronously rotated in opposite directions, the brake lever 59 is pressed by the connecting shaft 38 and continuously rotated, and the brake arm 60 is attached to the stopper 26 attached to the arrangement base 20. The rotation of the brake lever 59 is stopped in contact with the brake lever 59 (see FIG. 24).
 ブレーキレバー59はストッパー26に接することにより回動停止位置に保持され、ブレーキレバー59の回動の停止に伴って駆動体34とマグネット32とローターギヤ33の回動が停止され、駆動体34が第2の回動端に保持される。このとき磁気駆動部27のコイル31に対する通電が停止されている。 The brake lever 59 is held in the rotation stop position by coming into contact with the stopper 26, and the rotation of the drive body 34, the magnet 32, and the rotor gear 33 is stopped when the rotation of the brake lever 59 is stopped, and the drive body 34 is moved. It is held at the second rotating end. At this time, the energization of the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 is stopped.
 ブレーキレバー59が連結軸38に押圧されて回動されるときには、ブレーキレバー59の押圧軸62によって解除アーム72の解除受け部77bが押圧され解除アーム72がロック解除バネ81の付勢力に反してロック解除位置からロック保持位置へ向けて回動されていく。このとき保持レバー71と解除アーム72は同軸を支点として各別に回動可能にされているため、ブレーキレバー59の押圧軸62によって解除アーム72の解除受け部77bが押圧されたときには解除アーム72がロック保持位置まで回動されるが、保持レバー71は解除アーム72に伴っては回動されない。ロック部材43はロックバネ55の付勢力によって被押圧板部54が解除アーム72の規制突部77cに押し当てられる方向へ付勢されているため、ロックバネ55の付勢力によって解除アーム72に伴って回動される。 When the brake lever 59 is pressed by the connecting shaft 38 and rotated, the release receiving portion 77b of the release arm 72 is pressed by the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59, and the release arm 72 is opposed to the urging force of the lock release spring 81. It is rotated from the unlocked position to the locked holding position. At this time, since the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are individually rotatable about the coaxial as a fulcrum, the release arm 72 is pressed when the release receiving portion 77b of the release arm 72 is pressed by the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59. Although it is rotated to the lock holding position, the holding lever 71 is not rotated with the release arm 72. Since the lock member 43 is urged in the direction in which the pressed plate portion 54 is pressed against the regulation protrusion 77c of the release arm 72 by the urging force of the lock spring 55, the lock member 43 is rotated along with the release arm 72 by the urging force of the lock spring 55. Be moved.
 ブレーキレバー59の押圧軸62によって解除受け部77bが押圧され解除アーム72がロック解除バネ81の付勢力に反してロック保持位置へ向けて回動されたときには、解除アーム72が保持レバー71から離隔されるため両端部がそれぞれ保持レバー71と解除アーム72に係合されている戻しバネ76の付勢力が大きくなっていく。従って、解除アーム72の回動に遅れて保持レバー71が戻しバネ76の付勢力によってロック保持位置へ向けて回動される(図25参照)。 When the release receiving portion 77b is pressed by the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59 and the release arm 72 is rotated toward the lock holding position against the urging force of the lock release spring 81, the release arm 72 is separated from the holding lever 71. Therefore, the urging force of the return spring 76 whose both ends are engaged with the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 increases. Therefore, the holding lever 71 is rotated toward the lock holding position by the urging force of the return spring 76 after the rotation of the release arm 72 (see FIG. 25).
 このとき戻しバネ76のバネ力がロック解除バネ81のバネ力より小さくされており、ロック部材43はブレーキレバー59の押圧軸62によって押圧されて回動される解除アーム72の回動速度より低速でロック保持位置まで回動される。 At this time, the spring force of the return spring 76 is smaller than the spring force of the lock release spring 81, and the lock member 43 is slower than the rotation speed of the release arm 72 which is pressed and rotated by the pressing shaft 62 of the brake lever 59. Is rotated to the lock holding position.
 上記のように駆動体34が第2の回動端に保持されたときには、駆動体34の回動に伴って動作された開閉羽根15が閉塞位置に至り開閉羽根15の開放位置から閉塞位置までの動作が終了し、ベース体13の開口13aが閉塞される。 When the drive body 34 is held at the second rotating end as described above, the opening / closing blade 15 operated by the rotation of the driving body 34 reaches the closing position and from the opening position to the closing position of the opening / closing blade 15. Is completed, and the opening 13a of the base body 13 is closed.
 このとき電磁石56に対する通電が停止されて磁力発生部57に磁力が発生している。従って、磁力発生部57によって吸着片45が引き寄せられ、吸着部57a、57aによって吸着片45が吸着され、ロック解除体42Aがロック保持位置まで回動されて初期状態に戻りロック部材43がロック位置まで回動されて初期状態に戻る。 At this time, the energization of the electromagnet 56 is stopped and a magnetic force is generated in the magnetic force generating portion 57. Therefore, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the magnetic force generating unit 57, the suction piece 45 is attracted by the suction parts 57a and 57a, the unlocking body 42A is rotated to the lock holding position, and the lock member 43 returns to the initial state and the lock member 43 is in the lock position. It is rotated to return to the initial state.
 開閉羽根15の開放位置から閉塞位置までの動作が終了すると、続いて、開閉羽根15の閉塞位置から開放位置までの動作が開始される。開閉羽根15の閉塞位置から開放位置までの動作が開始されるときには、撮像素子12は電子幕によって光が入射されない閉塞状態(非露光状態)にされる。 When the operation from the open position to the closed position of the opening / closing blade 15 is completed, the operation from the closed position to the open position of the opening / closing blade 15 is subsequently started. When the operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the closed position to the open position is started, the image sensor 12 is put into a closed state (non-exposure state) in which light is not incident by the electronic curtain.
 開閉羽根15の閉塞位置から開放位置までの動作は磁気駆動部27のコイル31に対して先程とは反対方向への通電が行われることにより開始される(図26参照)。 The operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the closed position to the open position is started by energizing the coil 31 of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the opposite direction to the previous one (see FIG. 26).
 コイル31に反対方向への通電が行われると、磁気駆動部27において発生した駆動力がローターギヤ33から駆動体34に伝達されて駆動体34が走行バネ40の付勢力に反して第2の回動端から第1の回動端まで回動されて初期状態に戻り、磁気駆動部27において発生した駆動力がローターギヤ33から駆動体34を介して開閉羽根15に伝達されて開閉羽根15が閉塞位置から開放位置まで動作される。 When the coil 31 is energized in the opposite direction, the driving force generated in the magnetic driving unit 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the driving body 34, and the driving body 34 is subjected to the second force against the urging force of the traveling spring 40. It is rotated from the rotating end to the first rotating end to return to the initial state, and the driving force generated in the magnetic drive unit 27 is transmitted from the rotor gear 33 to the opening / closing blade 15 via the driving body 34, and the opening / closing blade 15 Is operated from the closed position to the open position.
 駆動体34が第2の回動端から第1の回動端まで回動されるときには、駆動体34の連結軸38がブレーキアーム60から離隔されるが、駆動体34の戻し軸39がブレーキアーム60に連結軸38の接触方向と反対方向から接触され、戻し軸39によってブレーキレバー59が回動停止位置から減速開始位置まで回動されて初期状態に戻る。ブレーキレバー59は回動停止位置から減速開始位置へ向けて回動されることにより、押圧軸62が解除アーム72の解除受け部77bから離隔される。 When the drive body 34 is rotated from the second rotation end to the first rotation end, the connecting shaft 38 of the drive body 34 is separated from the brake arm 60, but the return shaft 39 of the drive body 34 brakes. The arm 60 is contacted from the direction opposite to the contact direction of the connecting shaft 38, and the brake lever 59 is rotated from the rotation stop position to the deceleration start position by the return shaft 39 to return to the initial state. The brake lever 59 is rotated from the rotation stop position to the deceleration start position, so that the pressing shaft 62 is separated from the release receiving portion 77b of the release arm 72.
 駆動体34が第2の回動端から第1の回動端まで回動されるときには、ロック部材43が非ロック位置からロック位置まで回動されており、駆動レバー36の摺動傾斜縁36dがロック部材43のロック部53bに摺動され、一旦、ロック部材43がロックバネ55の付勢力に反して回動される。さらに駆動体34が第1の回動端まで回動されると、摺動傾斜縁36dがロック部53bを乗り越え、ロックバネ55の付勢力によってロック部材43が回動されて被ロック部36cがロック部53bに係合され、駆動体34は走行バネ40の付勢力に反して回動が規制されロック状態にされ第1の回動端に保持されて初期状態に戻る。 When the drive body 34 is rotated from the second rotating end to the first rotating end, the lock member 43 is rotated from the unlocked position to the locked position, and the sliding inclined edge 36d of the drive lever 36d. Is slid on the lock portion 53b of the lock member 43, and the lock member 43 is once rotated against the urging force of the lock spring 55. Further, when the drive body 34 is rotated to the first rotation end, the sliding inclined edge 36d gets over the lock portion 53b, and the lock member 43 is rotated by the urging force of the lock spring 55 to lock the locked portion 36c. Engaged with the portion 53b, the drive body 34 is restricted from rotating against the urging force of the traveling spring 40, is locked, and is held at the first rotating end to return to the initial state.
 駆動体34が第1の回動端に保持されて初期状態に戻ったときには、コイル31に対する反対方向への通電が停止され、磁気駆動部27に開閉羽根15に対する駆動力が発生していない状態にされる。 When the drive body 34 is held by the first rotating end and returns to the initial state, the energization of the coil 31 in the opposite direction is stopped, and the magnetic drive unit 27 does not generate a driving force for the opening / closing blade 15. Be made.
 上記したように、ロック動作ユニット41Aが用いられた羽根開閉装置11及び撮像装置1にあっては、ロック解除体42Aが電磁石56に吸着される保持レバー71とブレーキレバー59によって押圧される解除アーム72とを有し、保持レバー71と解除アーム72が各別に回動可能にされている。 As described above, in the blade opening / closing device 11 and the imaging device 1 in which the locking operation unit 41A is used, the unlocking body 42A is pressed by the holding lever 71 and the brake lever 59 that are attracted to the electromagnet 56. 72, and the holding lever 71 and the release arm 72 are individually rotatable.
 従って、保持レバー71の回動速度をブレーキレバー59によって押圧される解除アーム72の回動速度と異なる速度にすることが可能になり、電磁石56による吸着時における保持レバー71の回動速度を解除アーム72の回動速度より低速にすることにより電磁石56によってロック解除体42Aが吸着されるときに電磁石56に対して付与される衝撃を低減し電磁石56の高い性能を維持することができる。 Therefore, the rotation speed of the holding lever 71 can be set to a speed different from the rotation speed of the release arm 72 pressed by the brake lever 59, and the rotation speed of the holding lever 71 at the time of attraction by the electromagnet 56 can be released. By making the rotation speed slower than the rotation speed of the arm 72, the impact applied to the electromagnet 56 when the unlocking body 42A is attracted by the electromagnet 56 can be reduced, and the high performance of the electromagnet 56 can be maintained.
 特に、電磁石56は吸着部57a、57aが硬度の低い材料によって形成されることも多く、ロック解除体42Aから電磁石56に対して付与される衝撃を低減することにより、吸着部57a、57aの摩耗を抑制し、電磁石56の耐久性の向上による良好な特性を確保することができる。 In particular, in the electromagnet 56, the suction portions 57a and 57a are often formed of a material having low hardness, and by reducing the impact applied to the electromagnet 56 by the unlocking body 42A, the suction portions 57a and 57a are worn. It is possible to secure good characteristics by improving the durability of the electromagnet 56.
 また、ロック解除バネ81によって解除アーム72が付勢され、保持レバー71を解除アーム72に近付く方向へ付勢する戻しバネ76が設けられ、戻しバネ76の付勢力がロック解除バネ81の付勢力より小さくされている。 Further, the release arm 72 is urged by the unlock spring 81, and a return spring 76 is provided to urge the holding lever 71 in a direction approaching the release arm 72, and the urging force of the return spring 76 is the urging force of the unlock spring 81. It has been made smaller.
 従って、ロック解除バネ81の付勢力より小さい付勢力を有する戻しバネ76によって保持レバー71が解除アーム72に近付く方向へ回動されるため、簡素な構成により電磁石56による吸着時における保持レバー71の回動速度を解除アーム72の回動速度より低速にすることができ、電磁石56におけるロック解除体42Aによる衝撃を簡素な構成によって確実に低減することができる。
Therefore, the holding lever 71 is rotated in the direction of approaching the releasing arm 72 by the return spring 76 having an urging force smaller than the urging force of the unlocking spring 81. The rotation speed can be made slower than the rotation speed of the release arm 72, and the impact of the unlocking body 42A on the electromagnet 56 can be reliably reduced by a simple configuration.
<2.電気的構成>
[2-1.撮像装置の電気的構成例]

 続いて、撮像装置1の電気的構成例を説明する。
 図27は、撮像装置1の電気的な内部構成例を示したブロック図である。
 図示のように撮像装置1は、光学ブロック90、撮像素子12、カメラ信号処理部91、画像処理部92、表示部93、記録制御部94、制御部95、ドライバ部96、及び操作部97を備えている。
 尚、図中では撮像装置1の動作電力源となるバッテリ98を示しているが、バッテリ98は撮像装置1に着脱自在とされてもよい。バッテリ98は、撮像装置1における必要各部の動作電源として用いられる。
<2. Electrical configuration>
[2-1. Electrical configuration example of image pickup device]

Subsequently, an example of the electrical configuration of the image pickup apparatus 1 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an example of an electrical internal configuration of the image pickup apparatus 1.
As shown in the figure, the image sensor 1 includes an optical block 90, an image sensor 12, a camera signal processing unit 91, an image processing unit 92, a display unit 93, a recording control unit 94, a control unit 95, a driver unit 96, and an operation unit 97. I have.
Although the battery 98, which is the operating power source of the image pickup device 1, is shown in the figure, the battery 98 may be detachable from the image pickup device 1. The battery 98 is used as an operating power source for each necessary part of the image pickup apparatus 1.
 光学ブロック90は、カバーレンズ、ズームレンズ、フォーカスレンズ等のレンズや絞り機構などを備えた光学系10と、羽根開閉装置(羽根開閉ユニット)11とを有する。
 光学系10により、被写体からの光(入射光)が導かれ、該入射光が羽根開閉装置11の開口13aを介して撮像素子12の撮像面に集光される。
 また、羽根開閉装置11には、電磁石56と磁気駆動部(モータ)27とが設けられている。電磁石56は、先の説明から理解されるように、駆動体34のロック/ロック解除を制御するための電子デバイスとして機能するものであり、電磁石56が通電されると駆動体34のロック状態が解除されて、走行バネ40の付勢力により駆動体34が回動して開閉羽根15の開放位置から閉塞位置への走行動作が開始される。
The optical block 90 includes an optical system 10 including a lens such as a cover lens, a zoom lens, and a focus lens, an aperture mechanism, and the like, and a blade opening / closing device (blade opening / closing unit) 11.
Light from the subject (incident light) is guided by the optical system 10, and the incident light is focused on the image pickup surface of the image pickup device 12 through the opening 13a of the blade opening / closing device 11.
Further, the blade opening / closing device 11 is provided with an electromagnet 56 and a magnetic drive unit (motor) 27. As understood from the above description, the electromagnet 56 functions as an electronic device for controlling the lock / unlock of the drive body 34, and when the electromagnet 56 is energized, the locked state of the drive body 34 is changed. After being released, the driving body 34 is rotated by the urging force of the traveling spring 40, and the traveling operation of the opening / closing blade 15 from the open position to the closed position is started.
 撮像素子12は、光学ブロック90を介して入射した光を光電変換し、受光量に応じた電気信号を得る。撮像素子12には、例えばCCD(Charge Coupled Device)センサーやCMOS(Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor)センサー等が用いられる。
 撮像素子12は、光電変換して得た電気信号について、例えばCDS(Correlated Double Sampling)処理、AGC(Automatic Gain Control)処理などを実行し、さらにA/D(Analog/Digital)変換処理を行う。そしてデジタルデータとしての撮像画像信号を、後段のカメラ信号処理部91に出力する。
The image sensor 12 photoelectrically converts the light incident through the optical block 90 to obtain an electric signal according to the amount of received light. For the image sensor 12, for example, a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) sensor, a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) sensor, or the like is used.
The image sensor 12 executes, for example, CDS (Correlated Double Sampling) processing, AGC (Automatic Gain Control) processing, or the like on the electric signal obtained by photoelectric conversion, and further performs A / D (Analog / Digital) conversion processing. Then, the captured image signal as digital data is output to the camera signal processing unit 91 in the subsequent stage.
 カメラ信号処理部91は、例えばDSP(Digital Signal Processor)等により画像処理プロセッサとして構成される。このカメラ信号処理部91は、撮像素子12からのデジタル信号(撮像画像信号)に対して、各種の信号処理を施す。例えば、ノイズ除去、画質補正、輝度・色差信号への変換等の各種の信号処理を行う。 The camera signal processing unit 91 is configured as an image processing processor by, for example, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) or the like. The camera signal processing unit 91 performs various signal processing on the digital signal (captured image signal) from the image sensor 12. For example, various signal processing such as noise removal, image quality correction, and conversion to a luminance / color difference signal is performed.
 画像処理部92は、所定の画像データフォーマットに基づく画像信号の圧縮符号化・伸張復号化処理や解像度等のデータ仕様の変換処理等を行う。 The image processing unit 92 performs compression coding / decompression decoding processing of an image signal based on a predetermined image data format, conversion processing of data specifications such as resolution, and the like.
 記録制御部94は、例えば不揮発性メモリによる記録媒体に対して記録再生を行う。記録制御部94は、例えば記録媒体に対し動画データや静止画データ等の画像ファイルやサムネイル画像等を記録する処理を行う。
 記録制御部94の実際の形態は多様に考えられる。例えば記録制御部94は、撮像装置1に内蔵されるフラッシュメモリとその書込/読出回路として構成されてもよいし、撮像装置1に着脱できる記録媒体、例えばメモリカード(可搬型のフラッシュメモリ等)に対して記録再生アクセスを行うカード記録再生部による形態でもよい。また撮像装置1に内蔵されている形態としてSSD(Solid State Drive)やHDD(Hard Disk Drive)などとして実現されることもある。
The recording control unit 94 performs recording / reproduction on a recording medium using, for example, a non-volatile memory. The recording control unit 94 performs a process of recording an image file such as moving image data or still image data, a thumbnail image, or the like on a recording medium, for example.
The actual form of the recording control unit 94 can be considered in various ways. For example, the recording control unit 94 may be configured as a flash memory built in the image pickup device 1 and a write / read circuit thereof, or a recording medium that can be attached to and detached from the image pickup device 1, such as a memory card (portable flash memory, etc.). ) May be in the form of a card recording / playback unit that performs recording / playback access. Further, as a form built in the image pickup apparatus 1, it may be realized as an SSD (Solid State Drive), an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), or the like.
 表示部93は、ユーザーに対して各種情報の表示を行い、例えば前述したディスプレイ7としての液晶パネル(LCD:Liquid Crystal Display)や有機EL(Electro-Luminescence)ディスプレイ等のディスプレイデバイスにより実現される。
 表示部93は、制御部95の指示に基づいて表示画面上に各種情報の表示を行う。例えば表示部93は、記録制御部94において記録媒体から読み出された画像データの再生画像を表示する。
 また表示部93には、例えば画像処理部92で表示用に解像度変換された撮像画像の画像データが供給され、表示部93は制御部95の指示に応じて、当該撮像画像の画像データに基づいて表示を行う場合がある。これにより構図確認中の撮像画像である、いわゆるスルー画(被写体のモニタリング画像)が表示される。
 また表示部93は制御部95の指示に基づいて、各種操作メニュー、アイコン、メッセージ等、即ちGUI(Graphical User Interface)としての表示を画面上に行う。
The display unit 93 displays various information to the user, and is realized by, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal panel (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display as the display 7 described above.
The display unit 93 displays various information on the display screen based on the instruction of the control unit 95. For example, the display unit 93 displays a reproduced image of the image data read from the recording medium by the recording control unit 94.
Further, the display unit 93 is supplied with image data of an captured image whose resolution has been converted for display by, for example, the image processing unit 92, and the display unit 93 is based on the image data of the captured image in response to an instruction from the control unit 95. May be displayed. As a result, a so-called through image (subject monitoring image), which is an captured image during composition confirmation, is displayed.
Further, the display unit 93 displays various operation menus, icons, messages, etc., that is, as a GUI (Graphical User Interface) on the screen based on the instruction of the control unit 95.
 操作部97は、ユーザーが各種操作入力を行うための入力デバイスを総括して示している。具体的に、操作部97は、撮像装置1の筐体に設けられたシャッター釦4、ズームスイッチ5、電源釦6、操作部8等の各種の操作子や、ダイヤル、タッチパネル、タッチパッド等の各種操作子を示している。
 操作部97によりユーザーの操作が検知され、入力された操作に応じた信号が制御部95へ送られる。
The operation unit 97 collectively shows input devices for the user to perform various operation inputs. Specifically, the operation unit 97 includes various controls such as a shutter button 4, a zoom switch 5, a power button 6, and an operation unit 8 provided in the housing of the image pickup device 1, a dial, a touch panel, a touch pad, and the like. Various controls are shown.
The operation unit 97 detects the user's operation, and a signal corresponding to the input operation is sent to the control unit 95.
 ドライバ部96は、光学ブロック90に設けられたアクチュエータ等の各種電子デバイスを駆動するためのドライバを包括的に表している。このドライバ部96には、光学系10におけるズームレンズ駆動モータに対するモータドライバ、フォーカスレンズ駆動モータに対するモータドライバ、絞り機構のモータに対するモータドライバ等が設けられている。また、特に本実施形態の場合、ドライバ部96には、シャッターモータとしての磁気駆動部27を駆動するためのシャッターモータドライバ部99と、電磁石56を駆動するためのバネ用ドライバ部100が設けられる。
 ドライバ部96における各ドライバは、制御部95からの指示に応じて対象とする電子デバイスを駆動する。
The driver unit 96 comprehensively represents a driver for driving various electronic devices such as actuators provided in the optical block 90. The driver unit 96 is provided with a motor driver for the zoom lens drive motor in the optical system 10, a motor driver for the focus lens drive motor, a motor driver for the motor of the aperture mechanism, and the like. Further, particularly in the case of the present embodiment, the driver unit 96 is provided with a shutter motor driver unit 99 for driving the magnetic drive unit 27 as a shutter motor and a spring driver unit 100 for driving the electromagnet 56. ..
Each driver in the driver unit 96 drives a target electronic device in response to an instruction from the control unit 95.
 制御部95は、例えばCPU(Central Processing Unit)、ROM(Read Only Memory)、RAM(Random Access Memory)等を備えたマイクロコンピュータ(演算処理装置)を有して構成され、ROMに記憶されたプログラムを実行することで、撮像装置1の全体を制御する。
 例えば、制御部95は、撮像素子12のシャッタースピード(露光時間)の制御、カメラ信号処理部91における各種信号処理の指示、ユーザーの操作に応じた撮像動作や記録動作、記録した画像ファイルの再生動作のための記録制御部94の制御を行う。また制御部95は、光学系10におけるズームレンズ、フォーカスレンズ、絞り機構等の動作、ユーザインタフェース動作等について、必要各部の動作を制御する。
The control unit 95 includes, for example, a microcomputer (arithmetic processing device) equipped with a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory), a RAM (Random Access Memory), and the like, and is a program stored in the ROM. By executing the above, the entire image pickup apparatus 1 is controlled.
For example, the control unit 95 controls the shutter speed (exposure time) of the image sensor 12, instructs the camera signal processing unit 91 to process various signals, performs an imaging operation and a recording operation according to a user's operation, and reproduces a recorded image file. It controls the recording control unit 94 for operation. Further, the control unit 95 controls the operation of each necessary unit regarding the operation of the zoom lens, focus lens, aperture mechanism, etc., user interface operation, etc. in the optical system 10.
 また、特に本実施形態における制御部95は、シャッターモータドライバ部99に対する指示を行って磁気駆動部27の動作を制御し、また、バネ用ドライバ部100に対する指示を行って電磁石56の動作を制御する。
 上記したシャッタースピードの制御において、制御部95は、撮像素子12の電荷リセットのタイミング制御(電子先幕の走行制御)や、磁気駆動部27や電磁石56の動作制御による開閉羽根15(後幕)の走行制御を行う。
Further, in particular, the control unit 95 in the present embodiment gives an instruction to the shutter motor driver unit 99 to control the operation of the magnetic drive unit 27, and also gives an instruction to the spring driver unit 100 to control the operation of the electromagnet 56. To do.
In the above-mentioned shutter speed control, the control unit 95 controls the charge reset timing of the image sensor 12 (travel control of the electronic front curtain) and the opening / closing blade 15 (rear curtain) by controlling the operation of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the electromagnet 56. Run control.
 また、本実施形態における制御部95は、ユーザーの操作に基づき、以下の各項目についての設定を行うことが可能とされる。

 ・開閉羽根15の走行速度:「幕速」
 ・連写速度(静止画としての撮像画像データの単位時間あたりの取得回数:例えば、コマ/秒):「コマ速」
 ・フラッシュ(ストロボ)3のON/OFF(発光/非発光)
 ・ストロボ同調速度
 ・静音モードのON/OFF

 ここで、開閉羽根15の走行速度については、後幕の走行速度という観点より以下「幕速」と表記する。また、連写速度については以下「コマ速」と表記する。さらに、「フラッシュ」については「ストロボ」と表記することもある。
 上記の項目のうち幕速とコマ速の項目については、「AUTO」(自動選択)の指定も可能とされる。この「AUTO」が指定された場合、制御部95が最適とされる値(パラメータ)を設定する。
 また上記項目において、静音モードは、羽根開閉装置11における開閉羽根15の走行に伴い生じる音に関するモードである。静音モードONでは、静粛性を高めた開閉羽根15の走行が行われるようにする。
Further, the control unit 95 in the present embodiment can set each of the following items based on the user's operation.

-Running speed of opening / closing blade 15: "curtain speed"
-Continuous shooting speed (number of acquisitions of captured image data as a still image per unit time: for example, frame / sec): "frame speed"
-Flash (strobe) 3 ON / OFF (flash / non-flash)
・ Strobe synchronization speed ・ Silent mode ON / OFF

Here, the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is hereinafter referred to as "curtain speed" from the viewpoint of the traveling speed of the rear curtain. The continuous shooting speed is hereinafter referred to as "frame speed". Furthermore, "flash" may be referred to as "strobe".
Of the above items, "AUTO" (automatic selection) can also be specified for the curtain speed and frame speed items. When this "AUTO" is specified, the control unit 95 sets the optimum value (parameter).
Further, in the above item, the silent mode is a mode related to the sound generated by the traveling of the opening / closing blade 15 in the blade opening / closing device 11. When the silent mode is ON, the opening / closing blade 15 with improved quietness is started to run.
 ここで、本実施形態では、幕速の高速化を図るべく、磁気駆動部27の駆動電力源に大容量のキャパシタを用いるようにしている。
 図28は、本実施形態における磁気駆動部27の駆動系の回路構成例を示している。
 図示のようにバッテリ98の出力電圧はシャッターモータドライバ部99に供給される。
 シャッターモータドライバ部99は、DC/DCコンバータ101、キャパシタ102、及びドライバIC(Integrated Circuit)103を有している。
 DC/DCコンバータ101は、本例では昇圧型のスイッチングレギュレータとして構成され、バッテリ98からの出力電圧を昇圧して出力する。
 キャパシタ102は、DC/DCコンバータ101の出力電圧を受けて充電され、該キャパシタ102の両端子間電圧がドライバIC103の電源電圧として供給される。
Here, in the present embodiment, a large-capacity capacitor is used as the drive power source of the magnetic drive unit 27 in order to increase the curtain speed.
FIG. 28 shows a circuit configuration example of the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27 in this embodiment.
As shown in the figure, the output voltage of the battery 98 is supplied to the shutter motor driver unit 99.
The shutter motor driver unit 99 includes a DC / DC converter 101, a capacitor 102, and a driver IC (Integrated Circuit) 103.
In this example, the DC / DC converter 101 is configured as a step-up switching regulator, boosts the output voltage from the battery 98, and outputs the voltage.
The capacitor 102 is charged by receiving the output voltage of the DC / DC converter 101, and the voltage between both terminals of the capacitor 102 is supplied as the power supply voltage of the driver IC 103.
 ドライバIC103は、例えば四つのトランジスタによるHブリッジ回路を有して構成され、キャパシタ102より供給される電源電圧に応じた駆動電流を磁気駆動部27に供給する。このとき、ドライバIC103は、制御部95からの指示に基づき磁気駆動部27への駆動電流の供給を行う。またドライバIC103は、上記のHブリッジ回路により、制御部95から指示された方向(極性)の駆動電流を磁気駆動部27のコイル31(図28では不図示)に流す。
The driver IC 103 is configured to include, for example, an H-bridge circuit consisting of four transistors, and supplies a drive current corresponding to the power supply voltage supplied from the capacitor 102 to the magnetic drive unit 27. At this time, the driver IC 103 supplies the drive current to the magnetic drive unit 27 based on the instruction from the control unit 95. Further, the driver IC 103 causes a drive current in the direction (polarity) instructed by the control unit 95 to flow through the coil 31 (not shown in FIG. 28) of the magnetic drive unit 27 by the above H-bridge circuit.
[2-2.走行モードについて]

 ここで、本実施形態の撮像装置1は、羽根開閉装置11における開閉羽根15の走行モードとして、磁気駆動部27と走行バネ40の双方が開閉羽根15に走行動力を伝達する走行モードであるハイブリッド走行モードと、磁気駆動部27と走行バネ40のうち走行バネ40のみが開閉羽根15に走行動力を伝達する走行モードであるバネ走行モードとを有する。
 制御部95は、これらハイブリッド走行モードとバネ走行モードとの間で開閉羽根15の走行モードの切り替えを行う。
[2-2. About driving mode]

Here, the imaging device 1 of the present embodiment is a hybrid in which both the magnetic drive unit 27 and the traveling spring 40 transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade 15 as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade 15 in the blade opening / closing device 11. It has a traveling mode and a spring traveling mode in which only the traveling spring 40 of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the traveling spring 40 transmits traveling power to the opening / closing blade 15.
The control unit 95 switches the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade 15 between the hybrid traveling mode and the spring traveling mode.
 図29は、走行モードごとの動作を説明するための図であり、図29Aはハイブリッド走行モード時の動作説明図、図29Bはバネ走行モード時の動作説明図である。
 先ず、何れの走行モードにおいても、シャッター釦4の操作に応じてレリーズ開始となると、電子幕としての先幕の走行が開始され、撮像素子12において露光領域が徐々に拡大されていく。尚、レリーズ開始時点では、キャパシタ102への充電は完了していることが前提となる。
 そして、先幕の走行開始後、シャッタースピードの設定値に応じたタイミングで後幕としての開閉羽根15の走行(前述した閉塞位置への走行)が開始される。
FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining the operation for each traveling mode, FIG. 29A is an operation explanatory diagram in the hybrid traveling mode, and FIG. 29B is an operation explanatory diagram in the spring traveling mode.
First, in any of the traveling modes, when the release is started in response to the operation of the shutter button 4, the traveling of the front curtain as the electronic curtain is started, and the exposure area is gradually expanded in the image sensor 12. At the start of release, it is assumed that the capacitor 102 has been charged.
Then, after the start of the traveling of the front curtain, the traveling of the opening / closing blade 15 as the rear curtain (traveling to the closed position described above) is started at a timing corresponding to the set value of the shutter speed.
 図29Aに示すハイブリッド走行モード時には、開閉羽根15を閉塞位置に走行させるための動力源として磁気駆動部27が用いられるため、開閉羽根15の走行開始と共にキャパシタ102が放電される。開閉羽根15の走行が終了(つまり前述した閉塞位置に至る)と、磁気駆動部27の駆動が停止されてキャパシタ102の放電が停止すると共に、キャパシタ102の充電が開始される。この充電は、走行バネ40の巻き上げ(本例では開閉羽根15を開放位置に戻す動作ともなる)に必要な電力を蓄えるために行われる。
 該充電が完了すると、走行バネ40の巻き上げのための磁気駆動部27の駆動が開始されるため、キャパシタ102が再度放電される。走行バネ40の巻き上げが完了する(つまり開閉羽根15が開放位置に至る)と、キャパシタ102に対する再度の充電が開始される。この再度の充電は、次のレリーズ時において磁気駆動部27が開閉羽根15を開放位置から閉塞位置へと走行させるための電力を蓄えるために行われる。
 この再度の充電が完了すると、次のレリーズを開始可能な状態となる。
In the hybrid traveling mode shown in FIG. 29A, since the magnetic drive unit 27 is used as a power source for traveling the opening / closing blade 15 to the closed position, the capacitor 102 is discharged when the opening / closing blade 15 starts traveling. When the traveling of the opening / closing blade 15 is completed (that is, the closing position is reached as described above), the driving of the magnetic driving unit 27 is stopped, the discharging of the capacitor 102 is stopped, and the charging of the capacitor 102 is started. This charging is performed to store the electric power required for winding up the traveling spring 40 (in this example, the opening / closing blade 15 is also returned to the open position).
When the charging is completed, the driving of the magnetic driving unit 27 for winding up the traveling spring 40 is started, so that the capacitor 102 is discharged again. When the winding of the traveling spring 40 is completed (that is, the opening / closing blade 15 reaches the open position), the capacitor 102 is charged again. This recharging is performed so that the magnetic drive unit 27 stores electric power for moving the opening / closing blade 15 from the open position to the closed position at the next release.
When this recharging is completed, the next release can be started.
 一方で、図29Bに示すバネ走行モード時には、開閉羽根15の閉塞位置への走行は走行バネ40の動力により行われ、磁気駆動部27は用いられない。このため、開閉羽根15の走行が開始してもキャパシタ102の放電は行われない。この場合は、開閉羽根15の閉塞位置への走行が終了した後、走行バネ40を巻き上げる際にキャパシタ102が放電される。そして、走行バネ40の巻き上げが完了すると、キャパシタ102に対する充電が開始され、該充電が完了すると、次のレリーズを開始可能な状態となる。 On the other hand, in the spring traveling mode shown in FIG. 29B, the opening / closing blade 15 travels to the closed position by the power of the traveling spring 40, and the magnetic drive unit 27 is not used. Therefore, the capacitor 102 is not discharged even when the opening / closing blade 15 starts running. In this case, the capacitor 102 is discharged when the traveling spring 40 is wound up after the traveling to the closed position of the opening / closing blade 15 is completed. Then, when the winding of the traveling spring 40 is completed, charging of the capacitor 102 is started, and when the charging is completed, the next release can be started.
 ハイブリッド走行モードでは、開閉羽根15の走行に走行バネ40と磁気駆動部27の双方の動力が用いられるため、幕速の高速化を図ることができる。
 一方、バネ走行モードでは、ハイブリッド走行モードと比べて1レリーズあたり(つまり撮像画像の1コマあたり)のキャパシタ102の充電回数(充電時間とも換言できる)が低減されるため、次レリーズを開始可能となるまでの待ち時間を低減でき、コマ速の高速化を図ることができる(図29Bの矢印「X」参照)。
In the hybrid traveling mode, since the powers of both the traveling spring 40 and the magnetic drive unit 27 are used for traveling the opening / closing blade 15, the curtain speed can be increased.
On the other hand, in the spring driving mode, the number of times the capacitor 102 is charged per release (that is, per frame of the captured image) is reduced (in other words, the charging time) as compared with the hybrid driving mode, so that the next release can be started. It is possible to reduce the waiting time until it becomes possible and to increase the frame speed (see the arrow "X" in FIG. 29B).
 本実施形態では、このようなハイブリッド走行モードとバネ走行モードとの間で走行モードの切り替えを行うことで、幕速を高めた撮像とコマ速を高めた撮像という相反関係となる撮像を1台の撮像装置により実現することができる。 In the present embodiment, by switching the driving mode between the hybrid driving mode and the spring driving mode, one imaging device having a contradictory relationship of imaging with an increased curtain speed and imaging with an increased frame speed is performed. It can be realized by the image pickup device of.
 ここで、ハイブリッド走行モードでは、走行バネ40の動力のみでなく磁気駆動部27の動力が用いられる。この点に鑑みると、ハイブリッド走行モードとバネ走行モードは次のように定義することもできる。すなわち、ハイブリッド走行モードは磁気駆動部27の消費電力が高い走行モード、バネ走行モードは磁気駆動部27の消費電力が低い走行モードである。簡潔に言えば、ハイブリッド走行モードとバネ走行モードは磁気駆動部27の消費電力が異なる走行モードである。 Here, in the hybrid traveling mode, not only the power of the traveling spring 40 but also the power of the magnetic drive unit 27 is used. In view of this point, the hybrid driving mode and the spring driving mode can also be defined as follows. That is, the hybrid travel mode is a travel mode in which the power consumption of the magnetic drive unit 27 is high, and the spring travel mode is a travel mode in which the power consumption of the magnetic drive unit 27 is low. Briefly, the hybrid traveling mode and the spring traveling mode are traveling modes in which the power consumption of the magnetic drive unit 27 is different.
 また、走行バネ40の動力のみでなく磁気駆動部27の動力が用いられると、幕速の高速化が図られる。この観点では、ハイブリッド走行モードは、開閉羽根15の走行速度が速い走行モードであり、またバネ走行モードは該走行速度が遅い走行モードであると定義することもできる(すなわち、ハイブリッド走行モードとバネ走行モードは開閉羽根15の走行速度が異なる走行モードである)。 Further, if not only the power of the traveling spring 40 but also the power of the magnetic drive unit 27 is used, the curtain speed can be increased. From this point of view, the hybrid traveling mode can be defined as a traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade 15 is high, and the spring traveling mode can be defined as a traveling mode in which the traveling speed is slow (that is, the hybrid traveling mode and the spring). The traveling mode is a traveling mode in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades 15 are different).
 また、上記では、バネ走行モードは、走行バネ40のみが開閉羽根15に走行動力を伝達する走行モードであるとしたが、バネ走行モードとしては、磁気駆動部27が走行バネ40の動力を僅かにアシストする場合も含み得る。この点に鑑みると、ハイブリッド走行モードとバネ走行モードは次のように定義することもできる。すなわち、ハイブリッド走行モードは磁気駆動部27と走行バネ40の双方が開閉羽根15の走行動力を伝達するモードであり、バネ走行モードは、走行バネが該走行動力を伝達するモードであって、磁気駆動部27の消費電力がハイブリッド走行モードよりも低いモードである、との定義である。
 なお、バネ走行モード時において磁気駆動部27が僅かにアシストする例としては、走行バネ40のトルクの経時変化や個体差を吸収するように磁気駆動部27によるアシストを行うこと等が考えられる。
Further, in the above, the spring traveling mode is a traveling mode in which only the traveling spring 40 transmits the traveling power to the opening / closing blade 15, but in the spring traveling mode, the magnetic drive unit 27 slightly reduces the power of the traveling spring 40. It may also include the case of assisting. In view of this point, the hybrid driving mode and the spring driving mode can also be defined as follows. That is, the hybrid traveling mode is a mode in which both the magnetic drive unit 27 and the traveling spring 40 transmit the traveling power of the opening / closing blade 15, and the spring traveling mode is a mode in which the traveling spring transmits the traveling power. It is defined that the power consumption of the drive unit 27 is lower than that of the hybrid driving mode.
As an example in which the magnetic drive unit 27 slightly assists in the spring travel mode, it is conceivable that the magnetic drive unit 27 assists the traveling spring 40 so as to absorb changes in torque with time and individual differences.
[2-3.制御例I]

 上記のような走行モードの切り替えは、ストロボ同調速度の設定に応じて行うことが考えられる。
 図30のフローチャートは、ストロボ同調速度に応じた走行モード切り替えのための処理を示している。尚、本例において、図30に示す処理は制御部95が上述したROMに記憶されたプログラムに基づき実行する。
[2-3. Control example I]

It is conceivable that the above-mentioned switching of the traveling mode is performed according to the setting of the strobe tuning speed.
The flowchart of FIG. 30 shows a process for switching the traveling mode according to the strobe tuning speed. In this example, the process shown in FIG. 30 is executed by the control unit 95 based on the program stored in the ROM described above.
 先ず、ステップST1で制御部95は、ストロボ同調速度の設定変更があるまで待機している。具体的に本例では、ユーザーの操作に基づきストロボ同調速度の設定値が変更されるまで待機する。
 ストロボ同調速度の設定変更があった場合、制御部95はステップST2でストロボONか否か、すなわちフラッシュ3のON/OFF設定値としてONを表す値が設定されているか否かを判定する。
 ストロボONでなければ、制御部95は図30に示す一連の処理を終える。すなわち、ストロボOFFであれば以降で説明するステップST3以降の処理を実行する必要がないため、制御部95は図30に示す処理を終える。
First, in step ST1, the control unit 95 waits until the setting of the strobe tuning speed is changed. Specifically, in this example, the process waits until the strobe tuning speed setting value is changed based on the user's operation.
When the setting of the strobe tuning speed is changed, the control unit 95 determines in step ST2 whether or not the strobe is ON, that is, whether or not a value indicating ON is set as the ON / OFF setting value of the flash 3.
If the strobe is not ON, the control unit 95 ends a series of processes shown in FIG. That is, if the strobe is OFF, it is not necessary to execute the processes after step ST3 described later, so the control unit 95 finishes the process shown in FIG.
 一方、ストロボONであれば、制御部95はステップST3に進んでストロボ同調速度の設定値が閾値THsを超えているか否かを判定する。この閾値THsとしては、バネ走行モードで実現可能な最高速のシャッタースピード以下の値が設定される。
 ストロボ同調速度の設定値が閾値THsを超えていなければ、制御部95はステップST4に進んでバネ走行モードを選択し、図30に示す一連の処理を終える。
 一方、ストロボ同調速度の設定値が閾値THsを超えていれば、制御部95はステップST5に進んでハイブリッド走行モードを選択し、図30に示す一連の処理を終える。
On the other hand, if the strobe is ON, the control unit 95 proceeds to step ST3 and determines whether or not the set value of the strobe tuning speed exceeds the threshold value THs. As the threshold value THs, a value equal to or lower than the maximum shutter speed that can be realized in the spring running mode is set.
If the set value of the strobe tuning speed does not exceed the threshold value THs, the control unit 95 proceeds to step ST4 to select the spring traveling mode, and ends the series of processes shown in FIG.
On the other hand, if the set value of the strobe tuning speed exceeds the threshold value THs, the control unit 95 proceeds to step ST5 to select the hybrid traveling mode, and ends the series of processes shown in FIG.
 上記のような処理により、ストロボ同調速度が閾値THs以下の場合には、バネ走行モードとしてのコマ速に有利な走行モードに切り替えが行われ、コマ速の設定が前述した「AUTO」の場合には、ストロボ同調速度の設定値に応じた最速のコマ速を設定することが可能とされる。
 一方、ストロボ同調速度が閾値THsを超える場合には、ハイブリッド走行モードとしての幕速に有利な走行モードに切り替えが行われ、バネ走行モードでは実現不能とされる高速なストロボ同調速度による撮像を実現することが可能とされる。
By the above processing, when the strobe tuning speed is equal to or less than the threshold value THs, the running mode is switched to the running mode which is advantageous for the frame speed as the spring running mode, and when the frame speed is set to the above-mentioned "AUTO". Is capable of setting the fastest frame speed according to the set value of the strobe tuning speed.
On the other hand, when the strobe tuning speed exceeds the threshold THs, the driving mode is switched to a driving mode that is advantageous to the curtain speed as the hybrid driving mode, and imaging with a high strobe synchronization speed that cannot be realized in the spring driving mode is realized. It is possible to do.
 上記した制御例Iとしての処理により、ストロボ発光を伴う撮像に関して、高速なストロボ同調速度による撮像と、高速な連写速度による撮像とを1台の撮像装置で両立することができる。
By the processing as the control example I described above, with respect to the imaging accompanied by the strobe light emission, the imaging with a high strobe synchronization speed and the imaging with a high continuous shooting speed can be compatible with each other with one imaging device.
[2-4.制御例II]

 続いて、制御例IIについて説明する。
 制御例IIは、幕速、コマ速、及びシャッタースピードの3種のパラメータの調停に係るものである。
[2-4. Control example II]

Next, control example II will be described.
Control example II relates to arbitration of three types of parameters: curtain speed, frame speed, and shutter speed.
 先ず、制御例IIにおける前提事項について説明する。
 制御例IIでは、シャッタースピード、幕速、及びコマ速について、Hi(High)/Lowをそれぞれ図31に示すように定義する。
 図示のようにシャッタースピードのHi/Lowは、所定の閾値で区分される。具体的に本例では、該閾値はストロボ同調最高速度とする。ここで言うストロボ同調最高速度とは、ハイブリッド走行モードで実現可能とされるストロボ同調速度の最高速度を意味する。例えば、バネ走行モードではストロボ同調速度=1/250が限界であるとして、ハイブリッド走行モードでは1/500までのストロボ同調速度を実現可能とされる場合であれば、該1/500がストロボ同調最高速度に該当する。
 なお、以下ではシャッタースピードを「SS」と略すこともある。
First, the prerequisites in Control Example II will be described.
In Control Example II, Hi (High) / Low are defined as shown in FIG. 31 for the shutter speed, the curtain speed, and the frame speed, respectively.
As shown in the figure, the shutter speed Hi / Low is divided by a predetermined threshold value. Specifically, in this example, the threshold value is the maximum strobe tuning speed. The maximum strobe tuning speed referred to here means the maximum strobe tuning speed that can be realized in the hybrid driving mode. For example, if the strobe tuning speed = 1/250 is the limit in the spring running mode, and if it is possible to realize a strobe tuning speed up to 1/500 in the hybrid running mode, 1/500 is the highest strobe tuning. Corresponds to speed.
In the following, the shutter speed may be abbreviated as "SS".
 幕速、コマ速のHi/Lowについては、シャッター駆動としてバネ駆動(つまりバネ走行モード)、ハイブリッド駆動(ハイブリッド走行モード)の何れにより実現可能であるか否かにより区分される。具体的に、幕速については、バネ駆動で実現可能な範囲がLow、ハイブリッド駆動で実現可能な範囲がHiとされる。
 一方、コマ速については、ハイブリッド駆動で実現可能な範囲がLow、バネ駆動で実現可能な範囲がHiとされる。
 幕速については、パラメータとしてHiとLowの2値を設定可能とされる。
 コマ速については、パラメータとしては例えば1コマ/秒から8コマ/秒等の多段階の値を設定可能とされ、設定された値からHi/Lowが区分される。
 なお、前述のように、本実施形態では、幕速とコマ速については「AUTO」の設定も可能とされる。
The curtain speed and the frame speed of Hi / Low are classified according to whether or not the shutter drive can be realized by spring drive (that is, spring drive mode) or hybrid drive (hybrid drive mode). Specifically, regarding the curtain speed, the range that can be realized by spring drive is Low, and the range that can be realized by hybrid drive is Hi.
On the other hand, regarding the frame speed, the range that can be realized by hybrid drive is Low, and the range that can be realized by spring drive is Hi.
For the curtain speed, two values, Hi and Low, can be set as parameters.
As for the frame speed, it is possible to set a multi-step value such as 1 frame / second to 8 frames / second as a parameter, and Hi / Low is classified from the set value.
As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set "AUTO" for the curtain speed and the frame speed.
 図32は、シャッタースピード(SS)、コマ速、幕速の各機能の設定の組み合わせを示している。
 組み合わせとしては、図中の(1)から(8)の八つの組み合わせが考えられ、(1)から(4)はシャッタースピードが全てHi、(5)から(8)はシャッタースピードが全てLowの組み合わせである。
 コマ速と幕速の双方がHiとなる(1)や(5)の組み合わせは成立しないため、考慮する必要はない。従って、シャッタースピード、コマ速、幕速のパラメータを調停する上では、(2)から(4)及び(6)から(8)の組み合わせについて考慮すればよい。
FIG. 32 shows a combination of settings for each function of shutter speed (SS), frame speed, and curtain speed.
As the combination, eight combinations (1) to (8) in the figure can be considered, the shutter speeds of (1) to (4) are all Hi, and the shutter speeds of (5) to (8) are all Low. It is a combination.
It is not necessary to consider the combination of (1) and (5) in which both the frame speed and the curtain speed are Hi. Therefore, in arbitrating the parameters of shutter speed, frame speed, and curtain speed, the combination of (2) to (4) and (6) to (8) may be considered.
 ここで、制御例IIにおいて、制御部95は、シャッタースピード、コマ速、幕速のHi/Lowの設定に応じて、現在の状態が幕速を優先すべき状態かコマ速を優先すべき状態かの状態管理を行うためのモード認識を行う。すなわち、幕速優先モード/コマ速優先モードの認識を行う。
 具体的に、制御部95は以下のように幕速優先モードとコマ速優先モードの認識を行う。

 ・ユーザーが幕速をHiに設定変更した場合=>幕速優先モードと認識
 ・ユーザーが幕速をLowに設定変更した場合=>コマ速優先モードと認識
 ・ユーザーがコマ速をLowに設定変更した場合=>幕速優先モードと認識
 ・ユーザーがSSをHiに設定変更した場合=>幕速優先モードと認識
 ・ユーザーがSSをLowに設定変更した場合=>コマ速優先モードと認識
Here, in the control example II, the control unit 95 is in a state in which the current state should give priority to the curtain speed or a state in which the frame speed should be prioritized, depending on the settings of the shutter speed, the frame speed, and the curtain speed Hi / Low. Mode recognition is performed to manage the status. That is, the curtain speed priority mode / frame speed priority mode is recognized.
Specifically, the control unit 95 recognizes the curtain speed priority mode and the frame speed priority mode as follows.

・ When the user changes the curtain speed to Hi => Recognizes as the curtain speed priority mode ・ When the user changes the curtain speed to Low => Recognizes as the frame speed priority mode ・ The user changes the frame speed to Low => Recognized as curtain speed priority mode-When the user changes the SS setting to Hi => Recognized as curtain speed priority mode-When the user changes the SS setting to Low => Recognized as frame speed priority mode
 制御例IIにおいて、制御部95は、ユーザーの操作により幕速、コマ速、シャッタースピードの何れかの設定変化があった場合にこれら幕速優先モード、コマ速優先モードの認識を行う。そして制御部95は、該認識の結果に基づき、幕速、コマ速、シャッタースピードの各パラメータの調停を行う。本例では、該調停においては、ストロボのON/OFFや「AUTO」の設定も考慮する。 In Control Example II, the control unit 95 recognizes the curtain speed priority mode and the frame speed priority mode when any of the curtain speed, frame speed, and shutter speed settings is changed by the user's operation. Then, the control unit 95 arbitrates each parameter of the curtain speed, the frame speed, and the shutter speed based on the recognition result. In this example, in the arbitration, the strobe ON / OFF and the "AUTO" setting are also taken into consideration.
 具体的な処理例を図33から図35のフローチャートを参照して説明する。
 先ず、図33において、制御部95はステップS101で、SS、幕速、コマ速の何れかの設定変更があるまで待機し、これら何れかの設定変更があった場合はステップS102でストロボがONか否かを判定する。ストロボがONでない場合、制御部95は図34に示す処理を実行し、ストロボがONである場合は図35に示す処理を実行する。
A specific processing example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 35.
First, in FIG. 33, the control unit 95 waits until any of the SS, curtain speed, and frame speed settings is changed in step S101, and when any of these settings is changed, the strobe is turned on in step S102. Judge whether or not. When the strobe is not ON, the control unit 95 executes the process shown in FIG. 34, and when the strobe is ON, executes the process shown in FIG. 35.
 先ず、ストロボがONでない場合の図34の処理について説明する。
 制御部95はステップS103で、幕速優先モードかコマ速優先モードかの判定を行う。すなわち、ステップS101で検知された設定変更に応じて幕速優先モード、コマ速優先モードの何れを認識したかについての判定を行う。
 先の説明から理解されるように、幕速優先モードと判定される場合とは、幕速をHi、コマ速をLow、SSをLowの何れかに設定変更された場合であり、コマ速優先モードと判定される場合とは、幕速をLow、コマ速をHi、SSをLowの何れかに設定変更された場合である。
First, the process of FIG. 34 when the strobe is not ON will be described.
In step S103, the control unit 95 determines whether the curtain speed priority mode or the frame speed priority mode is used. That is, it is determined whether the curtain speed priority mode or the frame speed priority mode is recognized according to the setting change detected in step S101.
As can be understood from the above explanation, the case where the curtain speed priority mode is determined is the case where the curtain speed is changed to Hi, the frame speed is set to Low, and the SS is set to Low, and the frame speed is prioritized. The case where the mode is determined is the case where the curtain speed is set to Low, the frame speed is set to Hi, and the SS is set to Low.
 幕速優先モードであると判定した場合、制御部95はステップS104で幕速はHiであるか否かを判定する。幕速がHiであれば、制御部95はステップS106に進んでコマ速設定は「AUTO」であるか否かを判定する。コマ速設定が「AUTO」であれば、制御部95はステップS107に進んでコマ速はLowの最高速設定とし、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
 一方、コマ速設定が「AUTO」でないと判定した場合、制御部95はステップS108に進んでコマ速はLowの範囲で選択可能とし、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
When it is determined that the curtain speed priority mode is set, the control unit 95 determines in step S104 whether or not the curtain speed is Hi. If the curtain speed is Hi, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S106 and determines whether or not the frame speed setting is "AUTO". If the frame speed setting is "AUTO", the control unit 95 proceeds to step S107 to set the frame speed to the maximum speed setting of Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame speed setting is not "AUTO", the control unit 95 proceeds to step S108 to make the frame speed selectable within the range of Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
 また、ステップS104において、幕速はHiでないと判定した場合、制御部95はステップS105に進んでSSはHiか否かを判定する。SSがHiであれば、制御部95は上記したステップS106に処理を進める。すなわち、コマ速設定が「AUTO」であればコマ速はLowの最高速設定とされ、「AUTO」でなければコマ速はLowの範囲で設定可能とされる。 If it is determined in step S104 that the curtain speed is not Hi, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S105 to determine whether SS is Hi or not. If the SS is Hi, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S106 described above. That is, if the frame speed setting is "AUTO", the frame speed is set to the maximum speed of Low, and if it is not "AUTO", the frame speed can be set within the range of Low.
 一方、ステップS105でSSがHiでなければ、制御部95はステップS109に進んでコマ速はLowに設定し、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。ここで、ステップS105でSSがHiでないと判定される場合とは、すなわちステップS101で検知された設定変更としてコマ速をLowにする設定変更が行われた場合であり、従ってステップS109ではコマ速はLowに設定する。 On the other hand, if SS is not Hi in step S105, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S109, sets the frame speed to Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33. Here, the case where the SS is determined not to be Hi in step S105 is the case where the setting change to set the frame speed to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore, in step S109, the frame speed is changed. Is set to Low.
 また、ステップS103において、コマ速優先モードと判定した場合、制御部95はステップS110に進んでコマ速はHiか否かを判定し、コマ速がHiであればステップS111で幕速はLow、SSはHi、Lowを選択可能として、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。 Further, in step S103, when the frame speed priority mode is determined, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S110 to determine whether or not the frame speed is Hi, and if the frame speed is Hi, the curtain speed is Low in step S111. The SS makes Hi and Low selectable, and finishes a series of processes following from FIG. 33.
 なお、確認のため述べておくと、SSについては、電子先幕と開閉羽根15の走行開始タイミングの時間差により調整可能なものであり、幕速がLowであってもSSはHiとすることができる。 For confirmation, the SS can be adjusted by the time difference between the electronic front curtain and the opening / closing blade 15's running start timing, and the SS can be Hi even if the curtain speed is Low. it can.
 一方、ステップS110において、コマ速はHiでないと判定した場合、制御部95はステップS112で幕速設定は「AUTO」であるか否かを判定する。幕速設定が「AUTO」であれば、制御部95はステップS113に進んで幕速はHi、SSはLowに設定し、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
 ここで、ステップS112で幕速設定が「AUTO」であると判定される場合とは、ステップS101で検知された設定変更としてSSをLowにする設定変更が行われた場合であり、従ってステップS113ではSSをLowに設定している。
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S110 that the frame speed is not Hi, the control unit 95 determines in step S112 whether or not the curtain speed setting is "AUTO". If the curtain speed setting is "AUTO", the control unit 95 proceeds to step S113 to set the curtain speed to Hi and SS to Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
Here, the case where the curtain speed setting is determined to be "AUTO" in step S112 is the case where the setting change to set SS to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore, step S113 Then SS is set to Low.
 また、ステップS112において、幕速設定が「AUTO」でないと判定した場合、制御部95はステップS114に進んで幕速はHi、Low選択可能とし、SSはHi、Low選択可能として、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
 ステップS112で幕速設定が「AUTO」でないと判定される場合とは、ステップS101で検知された設定変更として幕速をLow、又はSSをLowにする設定変更が行われた場合であり、従ってステップS114においては幕速、SSについてHi、Lowが選択可能である。
 この際、設定変更が幕速をLowとする設定変更であった場合には幕速をLowに設定し、設定変更がSSをLowとする設定変更であった場合にはSSをLowに設定する。
Further, when it is determined in step S112 that the curtain speed setting is not "AUTO", the control unit 95 proceeds to step S114 to select Hi or Low for the curtain speed, and Hi or Low can be selected for SS, as shown in FIG. 33. The following series of processing is completed.
The case where the curtain speed setting is determined not to be "AUTO" in step S112 is the case where the setting change to set the curtain speed to Low or SS to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore. In step S114, Hi and Low can be selected for the curtain speed and SS.
At this time, if the setting change is a setting change in which the curtain speed is Low, the curtain speed is set to Low, and if the setting change is a setting change in which SS is Low, SS is set to Low. ..
 ここで、ステップS113及びステップS114の処理については、前述した静音モードがONか否かを判定し、静音モードがONであれば幕速をLowに設定する処理を盛り込むこともできる。 Here, with respect to the processes of steps S113 and S114, it is possible to include a process of determining whether or not the above-mentioned silent mode is ON, and setting the curtain speed to Low if the silent mode is ON.
 続いて、ストロボON時に対応した図35の処理について説明する。
 先ず、制御部95はステップS119で、SSはストロボ同調速度に設定する。すなわち、ストロボONでありスリット露光が不可であるため、SSはストロボ同調速度に設定する。
Subsequently, the process of FIG. 35 corresponding to the strobe ON will be described.
First, the control unit 95 sets the strobe tuning speed in step S119. That is, since the strobe is ON and slit exposure is not possible, SS is set to the strobe synchronization speed.
 続くステップS120で制御部95は、幕速優先モードかコマ速優先モードかを判定する。
 幕速優先モードであれば、制御部95はステップS121に進んで幕速はHiか否かを判定し、幕速がHiであれば、ステップS122でコマ速設定は「AUTO」か否かを判定する。コマ速設定が「AUTO」であれば、制御部95はステップS123に進んでコマ速はLowの最高速設定とし、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
 一方、コマ速設定が「AUTO」でなければ、制御部95はステップS124でコマ速はLowの範囲で選択可能とし、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
In the following step S120, the control unit 95 determines whether the curtain speed priority mode or the frame speed priority mode is used.
In the curtain speed priority mode, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S121 to determine whether or not the curtain speed is Hi, and if the curtain speed is Hi, in step S122, whether or not the frame speed setting is "AUTO". judge. If the frame speed setting is "AUTO", the control unit 95 proceeds to step S123, sets the frame speed to the maximum speed setting of Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
On the other hand, if the frame speed setting is not "AUTO", the control unit 95 makes it possible to select the frame speed within the range of Low in step S124, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
 また、ステップS121で幕速はHiでないと判定した場合、制御部95はステップS125に進み、コマ速設定は「AUTO」か否かを判定し、コマ速設定が「AUTO」であれば、ステップS126に進んでコマ速はHiに設定し、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
 一方、ステップS125でコマ速設定は「AUTO」でなければ、制御部95はステップS127に進んでコマ速はHi、Lowを選択可能とし、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
 尚、ステップS125でコマ速設定は「AUTO」でないと判定される場合とは、ステップS101で検知された設定変更としてコマ速をHi、又はSSをHiにする設定変更が行われた場合であり、従ってステップS127においてはコマ速についてHi、Lowが選択可能である。尚、設定変更がコマ速をHiとする設定変更であった場合には、コマ速はHiに設定する。
If it is determined in step S121 that the curtain speed is not Hi, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S125, determines whether or not the frame speed setting is "AUTO", and if the frame speed setting is "AUTO", the step. Proceeding to S126, the frame speed is set to Hi, and a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33 is completed.
On the other hand, if the frame speed setting is not "AUTO" in step S125, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S127 to enable the frame speed to be selected from Hi and Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
The case where the frame speed setting is determined not to be "AUTO" in step S125 is the case where the frame speed is changed to Hi or SS is changed to Hi as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore, in step S127, Hi and Low can be selected for the frame speed. If the setting change is a setting change in which the frame speed is Hi, the frame speed is set to Hi.
 続いて、ステップS120において、コマ速優先モードと判定した場合、制御部95はステップS128に進んでコマ速はHiか否かを判定し、コマ速がHiであれば、ステップS129で幕速はLowに設定し、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
 一方、ステップS128でコマ速はHiでなければ、制御部95はステップS130に進んで幕速設定は「AUTO」であるか否かを判定し、幕速設定が「AUTO」でなければ、ステップS131で幕速はHiに設定し、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
 尚、ステップS130で幕速設定は「AUTO」であると判定される場合とは、ステップS101で検知された設定変更としてSSをLowにする設定変更が行われた場合(つまり幕速をLowにする設定変更でなかった場合)である。ステップS131では幕速設定が「AUTO」であるため、幕速をHiに設定している。
Subsequently, in step S120, when the frame speed priority mode is determined, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S128 to determine whether or not the frame speed is Hi, and if the frame speed is Hi, the curtain speed is set in step S129. It is set to Low, and a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33 is completed.
On the other hand, if the frame speed is not Hi in step S128, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S130 to determine whether or not the curtain speed setting is "AUTO", and if the curtain speed setting is not "AUTO", the step The curtain speed is set to Hi in S131, and a series of processes following from FIG. 33 is completed.
The case where the curtain speed setting is determined to be "AUTO" in step S130 is the case where the setting change to set SS to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101 (that is, the curtain speed is set to Low). If the setting was not changed). In step S131, the curtain speed is set to "AUTO", so the curtain speed is set to Hi.
 また、ステップS130で幕速設定は「AUTO」でなければ、制御部95はステップS132に進んで幕速はHi、Lowを選択可能とし、図33から続く一連の処理を終える。
 尚、ステップS130で幕速設定は「AUTO」でないと判定される場合とは、ステップS101で検知された設定変更として幕速をLow、又はSSをLowにする設定変更が行われた場合であり、従ってステップS132においては幕速についてHi、Lowが選択可能である。
 この際、設定変更が幕速をLowとする設定変更であった場合には幕速をLowに設定する。
If the curtain speed setting is not "AUTO" in step S130, the control unit 95 proceeds to step S132 to enable the curtain speed to be selected from Hi and Low, and ends a series of processes continuing from FIG. 33.
The case where the curtain speed setting is determined not to be "AUTO" in step S130 is the case where the setting change to set the curtain speed to Low or SS to Low is performed as the setting change detected in step S101. Therefore, in step S132, Hi and Low can be selected for the curtain speed.
At this time, if the setting change is a setting change in which the curtain speed is Low, the curtain speed is set to Low.
 ここで、ステップS131及びステップS132の処理については、前述した静音モードがONか否かを判定し、静音モードがONであれば幕速をLowに設定する処理を盛り込むこともできる。 Here, with respect to the processes of steps S131 and S132, it is possible to include a process of determining whether or not the above-mentioned silent mode is ON, and setting the curtain speed to Low if the silent mode is ON.
 制御部95は、上記のようなシャッタースピード、幕速、コマ速の3種のパラメータについての調停を行った結果、幕速=Hiとするケースでは、ハイブリッド走行モードを選択し、コマ速=Hiとするケースでは、バネ走行モードを選択する。
 具体的なケースとして、例えばステップS104やS121で幕速がHiと判定された場合には、ハイブリッド走行モードを選択する。また、例えばステップS113やS131で幕速をHiに設定した場合にもハイブリッド走行モードを選択する。
 或いは、例えばステップS110やS128でコマ速がHiと判定された場合には、バネ走行モードを選択し、また、例えばステップS126でコマ速をHiに設定した場合にもバネ走行モードを選択する。
As a result of arbitrating the three parameters of shutter speed, curtain speed, and frame speed as described above, the control unit 95 selects the hybrid driving mode in the case where the curtain speed = Hi, and the frame speed = Hi. In this case, the spring running mode is selected.
As a specific case, for example, when the curtain speed is determined to be Hi in steps S104 and S121, the hybrid traveling mode is selected. Further, for example, when the curtain speed is set to Hi in steps S113 and S131, the hybrid traveling mode is also selected.
Alternatively, for example, when the frame speed is determined to be Hi in steps S110 and S128, the spring travel mode is selected, and when the frame speed is set to Hi in step S126, for example, the spring travel mode is selected.
 この際、上記のようにステップS126でコマ速Hiとしたことに応じてバネ走行モードを選択することは、次のように換言できる。すなわち、幕速を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず(S121:N)、コマ速設定がAUTOである(コマ速を自動選択する設定が行われている)場合は(S125:Y)、バネ走行モードを選択するというものである。
 また、上記のようにステップS113で幕速Hiとしたことに応じてハイブリッド走行モードを選択することは、コマ速を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず(S110:N)、幕速を自動選択する設定が行われている場合は(S112:Y)、ハイブリッド走行モードを選択していると換言できる。
 これらの処理により、ユーザーの意図に沿った適切な走行モード選択が行われる。
At this time, selecting the spring traveling mode according to the frame speed Hi in step S126 as described above can be paraphrased as follows. That is, when the curtain speed is not specified to be increased above the predetermined speed (S121: N) and the frame speed setting is AUTO (the frame speed is automatically selected) (S125: Y). ), The spring running mode is selected.
Further, selecting the hybrid driving mode according to the curtain speed Hi in step S113 as described above does not specify that the frame speed is increased to a predetermined speed or higher (S110: N), and the curtain speed is not specified. When the setting for automatically selecting is set (S112: Y), it can be said that the hybrid driving mode is selected.
By these processes, an appropriate driving mode selection is performed according to the user's intention.
 尚、スリット露光を行う場合においても、幕速を上げることには意義がある。すなわち、幕速が速ければ、その分、同じSSであってもスリット幅を広げることが可能となり、このようなスリット幅の拡大が露光ムラの低減に繋がり、撮像画像の画質向上が図られる。 It is significant to increase the curtain speed even when performing slit exposure. That is, if the curtain speed is high, the slit width can be widened even if the SS is the same, and such expansion of the slit width leads to reduction of exposure unevenness, and the image quality of the captured image can be improved.
 ここで、上記ではキャパシタ102を設ける例を説明したが、例えば撮像装置1が電源として商用交流電源等の外部電源を用いる形態を採る場合等には、キャパシタ102を設けることは必須でない。
 キャパシタ102を設けない場合には、キャパシタ102の充電待ち時間は考慮せずに済む。すなわち、ハイブリッド走行モード時とバネ走行モード時とでコマ速は同等とすることができる。
 キャパシタ102を設けない場合であっても、ハイブリッド走行モードと走行モードとの間の切り替えを行うことで、開閉羽根の走行速度が速い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替えが可能とされ、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることができる。
Here, an example in which the capacitor 102 is provided has been described above, but it is not essential to provide the capacitor 102, for example, when the image pickup apparatus 1 adopts a form in which an external power source such as a commercial AC power source is used as the power source.
When the capacitor 102 is not provided, the charging waiting time of the capacitor 102 does not need to be considered. That is, the frame speed can be made the same in the hybrid traveling mode and the spring traveling mode.
Even when the capacitor 102 is not provided, by switching between the hybrid driving mode and the traveling mode, it is possible to switch from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is fast to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low, and it is quiet. And the life of the blade opening / closing device can be extended.
[2-5.第一変形例]

 以下、走行モードの切り替えとは別の制御として、キャパシタ102の充電時間を調整する構成の例(第一変形例から第三変形例)について説明する。
 第一変形例は、バッテリ98の残量に基づきキャパシタ102の充電電流を調整することで、バッテリ98の残量に応じたキャパシタ102の充電時間調整、すなわち連写速度調整を実現するものである。
[2-5. First modification]

Hereinafter, as a control different from the switching of the traveling mode, an example of a configuration for adjusting the charging time of the capacitor 102 (first modification to third modification) will be described.
In the first modification, the charging current of the capacitor 102 is adjusted based on the remaining amount of the battery 98 to realize the charging time adjustment of the capacitor 102 according to the remaining amount of the battery 98, that is, the continuous shooting speed adjustment. ..
 図36は、第一変形例としての撮像装置1における磁気駆動部27の駆動系の回路構成例を示している。
 なお以下の説明において、既に説明済みとなった部分と同様となる部分については同一符号を付して説明を省略する。
 図示のようにこの場合の駆動系においては、シャッターモータドライバ部99内に制御回路104が設けられる。制御回路104は、DC/DCコンバータ101の出力電流(つまりキャパシタ102の充電電流)について、定電流制御を行う。具体的に、本例では、DC/DCコンバータ101はスイッチングレギュレータとして構成されており、制御回路104は、DC/DCコンバータ101において入力電圧を断続するスイッチング素子のスイッチング動作をPWM(Pulse Width Modulation)制御するように構成される共に、該スイッチング素子のONデューティ(又はOFFデューティ)を、DC/DCコンバータ101の出力電流の値(電流値)が目標値Itで一定となるように調整する制御を行う。
FIG. 36 shows a circuit configuration example of the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the image pickup apparatus 1 as the first modification.
In the following description, parts that are similar to the parts that have already been explained are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in the figure, in the drive system in this case, the control circuit 104 is provided in the shutter motor driver unit 99. The control circuit 104 performs constant current control on the output current of the DC / DC converter 101 (that is, the charging current of the capacitor 102). Specifically, in this example, the DC / DC converter 101 is configured as a switching regulator, and the control circuit 104 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) the switching operation of the switching element that interrupts the input voltage in the DC / DC converter 101. Control is performed so as to control and adjust the ON duty (or OFF duty) of the switching element so that the output current value (current value) of the DC / DC converter 101 becomes constant at the target value It. Do.
 そして、この場合の制御部95は、バッテリ98の残量(充電残量)を示す値(例えばSOC:充電率)を取得し、取得した値に応じて、制御回路104による定電流制御の目標値Itを可変的に設定する。具体的には、バッテリ98の残量が多いほど目標値Itを高くする(つまりキャパシタ102の充電電流の値が大きくなるようにする)等である。
 例えば、この際の目標値Itの調整は、バッテリ98の残量についての閾値を用いた調整、具体的には、例えばバッテリ98の残量を示す値が閾値以上の場合は目標値Itとして第一の値を設定し、該閾値を下回った場合は目標値Itとして第二の値(<第一の値)を設定するような調整を行うことができる。或いは、バッテリ98の残量を示す値と目標値Itとの対応関係を表すテーブルや関数を用いて、該残量を示す値に応じた目標値Itを設定するという調整手法も考えられる。
Then, the control unit 95 in this case acquires a value (for example, SOC: charge rate) indicating the remaining amount (charge remaining amount) of the battery 98, and the target of constant current control by the control circuit 104 according to the acquired value. The value It is set variably. Specifically, the higher the remaining amount of the battery 98, the higher the target value It (that is, the value of the charging current of the capacitor 102 becomes larger).
For example, the adjustment of the target value It at this time is an adjustment using a threshold value for the remaining amount of the battery 98. Specifically, for example, when the value indicating the remaining amount of the battery 98 is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the target value It is set as the target value It. One value can be set, and if it falls below the threshold value, an adjustment can be made to set a second value (<first value) as the target value It. Alternatively, an adjustment method is also conceivable in which the target value It is set according to the value indicating the remaining amount by using a table or a function indicating the correspondence between the value indicating the remaining amount of the battery 98 and the target value It.
 このようにバッテリ98の残量に基づきキャパシタ102の充電電流を調整することで、バッテリ98の残量に応じたコマ速の調整を行うことができる。
 図37は、調整のイメージを説明するための図であり、図中の実線が第一変形例としての調整イメージを表す。
 図示の調整例では、バッテリ98の残量が多いほどキャパシタ102の充電電流を高めてコマ速が高速となるようにしている。
 尚、この場合は、バッテリ98の残量が少ない領域ではキャパシタ102の充電電流が低くなる、すなわちバッテリ98の負荷が軽くなる。バッテリ98が低残量状態で高負荷となると、バッテリ98の内部抵抗による電圧降下で出力電圧が低下してしまい、リセット電圧以下に低下してしまうリスクがある。図示の調整例のようにバッテリ98の残量の低下に応じて充電電流を低下させていく調整を行うことで、このようにバッテリ98の出力電圧が徒に低下してしまうことの防止を図ることができる。
By adjusting the charging current of the capacitor 102 based on the remaining amount of the battery 98 in this way, the frame speed can be adjusted according to the remaining amount of the battery 98.
FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining an image of adjustment, and the solid line in the figure represents an adjustment image as a first modification.
In the illustrated adjustment example, as the remaining amount of the battery 98 increases, the charging current of the capacitor 102 is increased so that the frame speed becomes higher.
In this case, the charging current of the capacitor 102 becomes low in the region where the remaining amount of the battery 98 is low, that is, the load of the battery 98 becomes light. When the battery 98 has a low remaining amount and a high load, the output voltage drops due to the voltage drop due to the internal resistance of the battery 98, and there is a risk that the output voltage drops below the reset voltage. By making adjustments that reduce the charging current according to the decrease in the remaining amount of the battery 98 as in the adjustment example shown in the figure, it is possible to prevent the output voltage of the battery 98 from being reduced unnecessarily. be able to.
 ここで、図37では比較として、第一変形例としての調整を行わない場合を一点鎖線により表している。第一変形例としての調整を行わない場合、キャパシタ102の充電電流は磁気駆動部27としてのモータのトルクや該モータのインピーダンス等によって定まり、コマ速の性能もこれらの要因に応じて定まるものとなる。そのため、バッテリ98の残量が多く十分な電力供給能力があるにも拘わらずコマ速性能を十分に引き出させない。
 これに対し、第一変形例としての調整を行うことで、バッテリ98の残量に応じてコマ速性能を十分に引き出すことができる。
Here, in FIG. 37, as a comparison, the case where the adjustment as the first modification is not performed is represented by the alternate long and short dash line. When the adjustment as the first modification is not performed, the charging current of the capacitor 102 is determined by the torque of the motor as the magnetic drive unit 27, the impedance of the motor, and the like, and the performance of the coma speed is also determined according to these factors. Become. Therefore, even though the battery 98 has a large remaining amount and has a sufficient power supply capacity, the frame speed performance cannot be sufficiently brought out.
On the other hand, by performing the adjustment as the first modification, the frame speed performance can be sufficiently brought out according to the remaining amount of the battery 98.
 尚、図37の点線により表すように、バッテリ98の残量が少ない領域(所定値以下の領域)において、バッテリ98の残量低下に対しコマ速を一定に保つ(つまりキャパシタ102の充電電流を一定に保つ)ような調整を行うこともできる。
As shown by the dotted line in FIG. 37, the frame speed is kept constant (that is, the charging current of the capacitor 102) with respect to the decrease in the remaining amount of the battery 98 in the region where the remaining amount of the battery 98 is small (the region below a predetermined value). It is also possible to make adjustments such as (keep it constant).
[2-6.第二変形例]

 第二変形例は、キャパシタ102の充電電圧を調整することで、磁気駆動部27の出力(モータ出力)の大きさの調整と共に、キャパシタ102の充電時間の調整を行うものである。
 図38は、第二変形例としての調整のイメージを説明するための図である。
 図38Aに示すように、幕速を上げる場合には、キャパシタ102の充電電圧を上げる。これにより、磁気駆動部27の駆動電圧が上昇し、磁気駆動部27の出力が上昇して幕速を速くすることができる。
 一方、コマ速を上げる場合には、図38Bに示すように、キャパシタ102の充電電圧を下げることで、キャパシタ102の充電時間を短くする。充電時間の短縮により、コマ速の向上を図ることができる。
[2-6. Second variant]

In the second modification, the charging voltage of the capacitor 102 is adjusted to adjust the size of the output (motor output) of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the charging time of the capacitor 102.
FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining an image of adjustment as a second modification.
As shown in FIG. 38A, when the curtain speed is increased, the charging voltage of the capacitor 102 is increased. As a result, the drive voltage of the magnetic drive unit 27 rises, the output of the magnetic drive unit 27 rises, and the curtain speed can be increased.
On the other hand, when increasing the frame speed, as shown in FIG. 38B, the charging time of the capacitor 102 is shortened by lowering the charging voltage of the capacitor 102. By shortening the charging time, the frame speed can be improved.
 図39は、第二変形例としての撮像装置1における磁気駆動部27の駆動系の回路構成例を示している。
 この場合の駆動系において、DC/DCコンバータ101は、出力電圧の値(電圧値)を変化させることが可能に構成されている。この場合の制御部95は、DC/DCコンバータ101に対する指示を行って、該出力電圧の値を調整する。
FIG. 39 shows a circuit configuration example of the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the image pickup apparatus 1 as a second modification.
In the drive system in this case, the DC / DC converter 101 is configured to be able to change the value (voltage value) of the output voltage. In this case, the control unit 95 gives an instruction to the DC / DC converter 101 to adjust the value of the output voltage.
 例えば、ストロボ同調速度を上げたい場合には、DC/DCコンバータ101の出力電圧、すなわちキャパシタ102の充電電圧を上げ、磁気駆動部27の出力が上がるようにすることが考えられる。一方、ストロボ発光を伴う撮像時において、コマ速を上げたいときはDC/DCコンバータ101の出力電圧、すなわちキャパシタ102の充電電圧を下げて充電時間が短縮化されるようにすることが考えられる。
 このような調整を行うことで、ストロボ同調速度を上げたい、又はコマ速を上げたいといった各シーンに応じた最適なシャッター性能を選択できるようになり、1台の撮像装置1で自由度の高い撮像を行うことが可能となる。
For example, when it is desired to increase the strobe tuning speed, it is conceivable to increase the output voltage of the DC / DC converter 101, that is, the charging voltage of the capacitor 102 so that the output of the magnetic drive unit 27 increases. On the other hand, in the case of imaging with strobe light emission, if it is desired to increase the frame speed, it is conceivable to reduce the output voltage of the DC / DC converter 101, that is, the charging voltage of the capacitor 102 so that the charging time is shortened.
By making such adjustments, it becomes possible to select the optimum shutter performance according to each scene, such as increasing the strobe synchronization speed or increasing the frame speed, and one image pickup device 1 has a high degree of freedom. It becomes possible to perform imaging.
 図40は、第二変形例における幕速とコマ速の関係を例示した図であり、図中の白丸によるプロットが該関係を表す。図中では比較として、第二変形例としての調整を行わない場合の幕速及びコマ速を黒丸により表している。
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the curtain speed and the frame speed in the second modification, and the plot by the white circle in the figure represents the relationship. In the figure, for comparison, the curtain speed and the frame speed when the adjustment as the second modification is not performed are represented by black circles.
[2-7.第三変形例]

 第三変形例は、磁気駆動部27の駆動電流を調整することで磁気駆動部27の出力の大きさの調整と共に、キャパシタ102の充電時間の調整を行うものである。
 図41は、第三変形例としての調整のイメージを説明するための図である。
 幕速を上げる場合には、磁気駆動部27の駆動電流を上げる。磁気駆動部27の駆動電流を上げると、図41Aのように、キャパシタ102の放電電流量が増大する一方で、キャパシタ102の電圧が低下する。
 磁気駆動部27の駆動電流を上げることで、磁気駆動部27の出力が上昇して幕速を速くすることができる。
 一方、コマ速を上げる場合には、磁気駆動部27の駆動電流を下げることで、キャパシタ102の充電時間を短くし、充電時間の短縮によりコマ速の向上を図ることができる。図41Bに示すように、磁気駆動部27の駆動電流を下げると、キャパシタ102の放電電流量が低下する一方で、キャパシタ102の電圧が上昇する。
[2-7. Third variant]

In the third modification, the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27 is adjusted to adjust the size of the output of the magnetic drive unit 27 and the charging time of the capacitor 102.
FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an image of adjustment as a third modification.
When increasing the curtain speed, the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27 is increased. When the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27 is increased, as shown in FIG. 41A, the amount of discharge current of the capacitor 102 increases, while the voltage of the capacitor 102 decreases.
By increasing the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27, the output of the magnetic drive unit 27 can be increased to increase the curtain speed.
On the other hand, when increasing the frame speed, the charging time of the capacitor 102 can be shortened by decreasing the driving current of the magnetic drive unit 27, and the frame speed can be improved by shortening the charging time. As shown in FIG. 41B, when the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27 is reduced, the discharge current amount of the capacitor 102 is reduced, while the voltage of the capacitor 102 is increased.
 図42は、第三変形例としての撮像装置1における磁気駆動部27の駆動系の回路構成例を示している。
 この場合の駆動系においては、ドライバIC103として、磁気駆動部27に対する出力電流を変化させることが可能な出力電流可変型のドライバICが用いられる。この場合の制御部95は、ドライバIC103に対する指示を行って、磁気駆動部27に対する出力電流の値、すなわち磁気駆動部27の駆動電流の値を調整する。
FIG. 42 shows a circuit configuration example of the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27 in the image pickup apparatus 1 as a third modification.
In the drive system in this case, as the driver IC 103, a variable output current type driver IC capable of changing the output current with respect to the magnetic drive unit 27 is used. In this case, the control unit 95 gives an instruction to the driver IC 103 to adjust the value of the output current to the magnetic drive unit 27, that is, the value of the drive current of the magnetic drive unit 27.
[2-8.第四変形例]

 第四変形例は、キャパシタ102の放電期間中においてもキャパシタ102を充電するものである。
 図43は、第四変形例のイメージを説明するための図であり、図43Aは比較としてキャパシタ102の放電中に充電を行わない場合を、図43Bはキャパシタ102の放電中にも充電を行う第四変形例の場合をそれぞれ示している。
 放電期間中も充電を行うことで、キャパシタ102の1レリーズあたりの充電時間の短縮化が図られ、図中の矢印X’で表すように、レリーズを開始可能となるまでの待ち時間の短縮化が図られる。従って、コマ速を高めることができる。
 なお、キャパシタ102の放電期間中にキャパシタ102を充電することは、磁気駆動部27の駆動中にキャパシタ102を充電することと換言することができる。
[2-8. Fourth variant]

The fourth modification is to charge the capacitor 102 even during the discharge period of the capacitor 102.
FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining an image of a fourth modification. FIG. 43A shows a case where charging is not performed during discharging of the capacitor 102 for comparison, and FIG. 43B shows charging during discharging of the capacitor 102. The cases of the fourth modification are shown respectively.
By charging during the discharge period, the charging time per release of the capacitor 102 can be shortened, and as shown by the arrow X'in the figure, the waiting time until the release can be started is shortened. Is planned. Therefore, the frame speed can be increased.
Charging the capacitor 102 during the discharge period of the capacitor 102 can be rephrased as charging the capacitor 102 while driving the magnetic drive unit 27.
 ここで、キャパシタ102の放電中(磁気駆動部27の駆動中)にキャパシタ102を充電する場合には、磁気駆動部27の駆動中に発生する大電力負荷がバッテリ98やバッテリ98に接続された他のデバイスに影響を与えることを考慮すべきである。
 このため第四変形例では、図44に示すように、磁気駆動部27の駆動系において前述した制御回路104を設けて、DC/DCコンバータ101の出力電流について定電流制御を行うことで、磁気駆動部27としてのバッテリ98の負荷の変動がバッテリ98や他デバイスに影響を与えてしまうことの防止を図る。
 なお、図44では制御回路104を設けて定電流化を図る構成としたが、これに代えて、DC/DCコンバータ101の前段に定電流回路を設けた構成とすることもできる。
Here, when the capacitor 102 is charged while the capacitor 102 is being discharged (while the magnetic drive unit 27 is being driven), a large power load generated during the drive of the magnetic drive unit 27 is connected to the battery 98 or the battery 98. It should be considered that it affects other devices.
Therefore, in the fourth modification, as shown in FIG. 44, the control circuit 104 described above is provided in the drive system of the magnetic drive unit 27, and the output current of the DC / DC converter 101 is controlled by a constant current to perform magnetism. This is to prevent fluctuations in the load of the battery 98 as the drive unit 27 from affecting the battery 98 and other devices.
In FIG. 44, the control circuit 104 is provided to achieve a constant current, but instead of this, a constant current circuit may be provided in front of the DC / DC converter 101.
[2-9.「撮像」について]
[2-9. About "imaging"]
 尚、本技術において、「撮像」とは、撮像素子12による光電変換処理からデジタル信号への変換、カメラ信号処理部91によるノイズ除去、画質補正、輝度・色差信号への変換等の処理、画像処理部92による所定の画像データフォーマットに基づく画像信号の圧縮符号化・伸張復号化処理等のデータ仕様の変換処理、記録制御部94による画像信号の書込処理までの一連の処理のうち、撮像素子12による光電変換処理を起点とした一部までの処理、又は全てを含む処理のことを言う。
 なお、上記処理において各処理の順番は適宜入れ替わってもよい。
In the present technology, "imaging" means processing such as conversion from photoelectric conversion processing by the image sensor 12 to a digital signal, noise removal by the camera signal processing unit 91, image quality correction, conversion to a brightness / color difference signal, and an image. Imaging of a series of processes from data specification conversion processing such as compression coding / decompression decoding processing of an image signal based on a predetermined image data format by the processing unit 92 to writing processing of an image signal by the recording control unit 94. It refers to a process starting from the photoelectric conversion process by the element 12 up to a part, or a process including all of them.
In the above processing, the order of each processing may be changed as appropriate.
<3.実施形態のまとめ>

 上記のように実施形態としての第一の撮像装置(同1)は、撮像面への入射光が通過する開口(同13a)を開閉する方向に走行動作する開閉羽根(同15)と、開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータ(磁気駆動部27)と、開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネ(同40)と、開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部(同95)と、を備え、制御部は、開閉羽根の走行モードとして、モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行うものである。
 これにより、モータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、モータの消費電力が高い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替え、すなわち、開閉羽根の走行速度が速い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替えが可能とされる。
 従って、モータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることが可能な走行モードにより開閉羽根を走行させることができる。すなわち、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることができる。
<3. Summary of embodiments>

As described above, the first imaging device (1) as the embodiment includes an opening / closing blade (15) that travels in the direction of opening / closing the opening (13a) through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, and an opening / closing blade (15). A motor (magnetic drive unit 27) provided so as to be able to transmit running power to the blades, a running spring (40) provided to be able to transmit running power to the opening / closing blades, and control for running control of the opening / closing blades. A unit (95) is provided, and the control unit switches the mode between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
As a result, for the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, switching from the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is high to the traveling mode in which the motor power consumption is low, that is, the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is low from the traveling mode. It is possible to switch to the driving mode.
Therefore, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, the opening / closing blades can be traveled in a traveling mode capable of improving quietness and extending the life of the blade opening / closing device. That is, it is possible to improve the quietness and extend the life of the blade opening / closing device.
 また、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、モータの駆動電力源となるキャパシタ(同102)を備えている。
 上記のキャパシタを備えることで、モータの駆動電圧を高めることができ、開閉羽根の走行速度の高速化を図ることが可能とされる。さらに、モータの消費電力が低い走行モータではキャパシタの充電に要する時間を短縮化できるため、連写速度の速いモードを実現可能となる。
 従って、モータの消費電力が高い走行モードとしての走行速度優先の走行モードと、モータの消費電力が低い走行モードとしての連写速度優先の走行モードとの切り替えを行うことができる。
Further, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, a capacitor (102) that serves as a driving power source for the motor is provided.
By providing the above-mentioned capacitor, the driving voltage of the motor can be increased, and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade can be increased. Further, in a traveling motor having low power consumption of the motor, the time required for charging the capacitor can be shortened, so that a mode with a high continuous shooting speed can be realized.
Therefore, it is possible to switch between a running mode in which the running speed is prioritized as a running mode in which the power consumption of the motor is high and a running mode in which the continuous shooting speed is prioritized as a running mode in which the power consumption of the motor is low.
 さらに、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、制御部は、消費電力が異なる走行モードとして第一走行モードと第二走行モードを有し、第一走行モードは、モータと走行バネの双方が走行動力を伝達するモードであり、第二走行モードは、走行バネが走行動力を伝達するモードであってモータの消費電力が第一走行モードよりも低いモードである。
 これにより、開閉羽根の走行モードとして、モータと走行バネの双方の動力により開閉羽根を駆動するハイブリッド走行モードと、走行バネのみが開閉羽根を駆動するとみなすことのできる(モータが開閉羽根の駆動を僅かにアシストする場合も含む)バネ走行モードとの切り替えを行うことが可能とされる。
 従って、ハイブリッド走行モードとしての、キャパシタの充電時間を長く要するが開閉羽根の走行速度を高めることのできる走行速度優先の走行モードと、バネ走行モードとしての、キャパシタの充電時間が短く連写速度を高めることのできる連写速度優先の走行モードとの切り替えを行うことができる。
Further, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, the control unit has a first traveling mode and a second traveling mode as traveling modes having different power consumption, and the first traveling mode includes both the motor and the traveling spring. Is a mode for transmitting the traveling power, and the second traveling mode is a mode in which the traveling spring transmits the traveling power and the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first traveling mode.
As a result, it can be considered that the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade is a hybrid traveling mode in which the opening / closing blade is driven by the power of both the motor and the traveling spring, and that only the traveling spring drives the opening / closing blade (the motor drives the opening / closing blade). It is possible to switch to the spring running mode (including the case of slightly assisting).
Therefore, the hybrid driving mode requires a long charging time for the capacitor, but the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades can be increased, and the traveling speed priority driving mode and the spring driving mode, in which the charging time of the capacitor is short and the continuous shooting speed is increased. It is possible to switch to a driving mode that prioritizes continuous shooting speed, which can be increased.
 さらにまた、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、モータの動力により走行バネが蓄勢され、制御部は、消費電力が異なる走行モードとして第一走行モードと第二走行モードを有し、第一走行モードは、キャパシタの充電回数が第二走行モードよりも少ないモードである。
 モータの動力により走行バネの蓄勢を行う場合、モータと走行バネの双方による開閉羽根の駆動を可能とするためには、キャパシタの充電として、バネ蓄勢用のモータ駆動電力を得るための充電と、開閉羽根駆動用のモータ駆動電力を得るための充電との2回の充電が必要とされる。このため、上記の第一走行モードではこれら2回の充電を行ってハイブリッド走行モードとしての走行モードを実現し、第二走行モードでは、バネ蓄勢用の充電のみを行って走行バネのみで開閉羽根を駆動するバネ走行モードを実現することが可能とされる。
 従って、ハイブリッド走行モードとしての、キャパシタの充電回数を多く要するが開閉羽根の走行速度を高めることのできる走行速度優先の走行モードと、バネ走行モードとしての、キャパシタの充電回数が少なく連写速度を高めることのできる連写速度優先の走行モードとの切り替えを行うことができる。
Furthermore, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, the traveling spring is stored by the power of the motor, and the control unit has a first traveling mode and a second traveling mode as traveling modes having different power consumption. The first traveling mode is a mode in which the number of times the capacitor is charged is less than that of the second traveling mode.
When the traveling spring is stored by the power of the motor, in order to enable the opening and closing blades to be driven by both the motor and the traveling spring, the capacitor is charged to obtain the motor drive power for spring energy storage. Two chargings are required, one for obtaining the motor driving power for driving the open / close blades and the other for obtaining the motor driving power. Therefore, in the above-mentioned first running mode, these two charges are performed to realize the running mode as the hybrid running mode, and in the second running mode, only the charging for spring storage is performed and the opening and closing is performed only by the running spring. It is possible to realize a spring running mode that drives the blades.
Therefore, as a hybrid running mode, a running mode that requires a large number of times to charge the capacitor but can increase the running speed of the opening / closing blades, and a running mode that gives priority to running speed, and as a spring running mode, the number of times the capacitor is charged is small and the continuous shooting speed is increased. It is possible to switch to a driving mode that prioritizes continuous shooting speed, which can be increased.
 また、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、制御部は、開閉羽根の走行速度、連写速度、シャッタースピードの何れかのパラメータに基づいて走行モードを選択している。
 例えば、開閉羽根の走行速度を速くする場合にはモータ消費電力が高いモードを選択すべきであり、連写速度を速くする場合にはモータ消費電力が低いモード(つまり充電時間が短いモード)を選択すべきである。また、シャッタースピードを速くする場合にはモータ消費電力が高いモードを選択すべき場合が考えられる。
 従って、上記のように開閉羽根の走行速度、連写速度、シャッタースピードの何れかのパラメータに基づいて走行モードを選択することで、撮像に係るパラメータの設定に応じた適切な走行モードの選択を行うことができる。
Further, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, the control unit selects the traveling mode based on any of the parameters of the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade, the continuous shooting speed, and the shutter speed.
For example, a mode with high motor power consumption should be selected to increase the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades, and a mode with low motor power consumption (that is, a mode with a short charging time) should be selected to increase the continuous shooting speed. You should choose. Further, when increasing the shutter speed, it may be necessary to select a mode in which the motor power consumption is high.
Therefore, by selecting the traveling mode based on any of the parameters of the opening / closing blade traveling speed, continuous shooting speed, and shutter speed as described above, it is possible to select an appropriate traveling mode according to the setting of the parameters related to imaging. It can be carried out.
 さらに、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、制御部は、ストロボ同調速度としてのシャッタースピードのパラメータに基づいて走行モードを選択している。
 これにより、ストロボ同調速度が、モータ消費電力の低い走行モードでは実現不能な速度である場合にはモータ消費電力の高い走行モードを選択し、逆にストロボ同調速度がモータ消費電力の低い走行モードで実現可能な速度である場合にはモータ消費電力の低い走行モードを選択して連写速度の向上を図ることが可能とされる。
 従って、ストロボ発光を伴う撮像に関して、高速なストロボ同調速度による撮像と、高速な連写速度による撮像とを1台の撮像装置で両立することができる。
Further, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, the control unit selects the traveling mode based on the parameter of the shutter speed as the strobe synchronization speed.
As a result, if the strobe tuning speed is a speed that cannot be achieved in the driving mode with low motor power consumption, the driving mode with high motor power consumption is selected, and conversely, in the driving mode with low motor power consumption. When the speed is feasible, it is possible to select a driving mode with low motor power consumption to improve the continuous shooting speed.
Therefore, with respect to imaging accompanied by strobe light emission, it is possible to achieve both imaging at a high strobe synchronization speed and imaging at a high continuous shooting speed with one imaging device.
 さらにまた、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、制御部は、走行モードとして、第一モードと第一モードよりもモータの消費電力が低い第二モードとを有すると共に、開閉羽根の走行速度を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず、連写速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合は、走行モードとして第二モードを選択している。
 これにより、ユーザーが開閉羽根走行速度を高める意図がないと推定される場合に連写速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合には、モータ消費電力の低い走行モード(つまり充電時間が短いモード)を選択することが可能とされる。
 従って、ユーザーの意図に沿った適切な走行モード選択を行うことができる。
Furthermore, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, the control unit has, as the traveling mode, the first mode and the second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode, and the traveling of the opening / closing blade. If the speed is not specified to be higher than the predetermined speed and the continuous shooting speed is set to be automatically selected, the second mode is selected as the traveling mode.
As a result, if the user is set to automatically select the continuous shooting speed when it is estimated that the user does not intend to increase the running speed of the opening / closing blade, the running mode with low motor power consumption (that is, the charging time is short). Mode) can be selected.
Therefore, it is possible to select an appropriate driving mode according to the user's intention.
 また、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、制御部は、走行モードとして、第一モードと第一モードよりもモータの消費電力が低い第二モードとを有すると共に、連写速度を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず、開閉羽根の走行速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合は、走行モードとして第一モードを選択している。
 これにより、ユーザーが連写速度を高める意図がないと推定される場合に開閉羽根走行速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合には、モータ消費電力の高い走行モード(つまりモータ出力が高まるモード)を選択することが可能とされる。
 従って、ユーザーの意図に沿った適切な走行モード選択を行うことができる。
Further, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, the control unit has a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode as the traveling mode, and determines the continuous shooting speed. When the speed is not specified to be higher than the speed and the setting for automatically selecting the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is set, the first mode is selected as the traveling mode.
As a result, when it is estimated that the user does not intend to increase the continuous shooting speed and the setting is made to automatically select the opening / closing blade traveling speed, the traveling mode with high motor power consumption (that is, the motor output increases). Mode) can be selected.
Therefore, it is possible to select an appropriate driving mode according to the user's intention.
 さらに、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、制御部は、走行モードの切り替えとは別の制御として、キャパシタの充電時間を調整する制御を行っている。
 キャパシタの充電時間の調整により、レリーズ開始から次のレリーズが開始可能となるまでの所要時間を変化させる、すなわち連写速度を変化させることが可能となると共に、モータの出力を変化させることが可能となるため、開閉羽根の走行速度を変化させることが可能となる。
 従って、連写速度と開閉羽根の走行速度について、調整の自由度向上を図ることができる。
Further, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, the control unit controls to adjust the charging time of the capacitor as a control different from the switching of the traveling mode.
By adjusting the charging time of the capacitor, it is possible to change the time required from the start of the release to the start of the next release, that is, the continuous shooting speed can be changed, and the output of the motor can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to change the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in adjusting the continuous shooting speed and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade.
 さらにまた、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、制御部は、撮像装置の動作電力源であるバッテリ(同98)の残量に基づきキャパシタの充電電流を調整する制御を行っている。
 これにより、バッテリ残量が多くバッテリに十分な電力供給能力がある場合には充電電流の電流値を上げて開閉羽根の走行速度を高め、バッテリ残量が少なくバッテリに十分な電力供給能力がない場合には充電電流の電流値を下げてバッテリの出力電圧が徒に低下することの防止を図ることが可能とされる。
 従って、バッテリ残量に応じた適切な開閉羽根走行速度の調整を行うことができる。
Furthermore, in the first image pickup apparatus as the embodiment, the control unit controls to adjust the charging current of the capacitor based on the remaining amount of the battery (98) which is the operating power source of the image pickup apparatus.
As a result, when the remaining battery power is high and the battery has sufficient power supply capacity, the current value of the charging current is increased to increase the running speed of the opening / closing blades, and the remaining battery power is low and the battery does not have sufficient power supply capacity. In that case, it is possible to reduce the current value of the charging current to prevent the output voltage of the battery from dropping unnecessarily.
Therefore, it is possible to appropriately adjust the opening / closing blade traveling speed according to the remaining battery level.
 また、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、制御部は、キャパシタの充電電圧を調整する制御を行っている。
 キャパシタの充電電圧を調整することで、モータ出力の大きさの調整、すなわち開閉羽根の走行速度の調整が行われると共に、キャパシタの充電時間が調整されることで連写速度の調整が行われる。
 従って、連写速度と開閉羽根の走行速度について、調整の自由度の向上を図ることができる。
Further, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, the control unit controls to adjust the charging voltage of the capacitor.
By adjusting the charging voltage of the capacitor, the magnitude of the motor output is adjusted, that is, the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is adjusted, and by adjusting the charging time of the capacitor, the continuous shooting speed is adjusted.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in adjusting the continuous shooting speed and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade.
 さらに、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、制御部は、モータの駆動電流を調整する制御を行っている。
 モータの駆動電流を調整することで、モータ出力の大きさの調整、すなわち開閉羽根の走行速度の調整が行われると共に、キャパシタの充電時間が調整されることで連写速度の調整が行われる。
 従って、連写速度と開閉羽根の走行速度について、調整の自由度向上を図ることができる。
Further, in the first imaging device as the embodiment, the control unit controls to adjust the drive current of the motor.
By adjusting the drive current of the motor, the magnitude of the motor output is adjusted, that is, the traveling speed of the on-off blades is adjusted, and the continuous shooting speed is adjusted by adjusting the charging time of the capacitor.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in adjusting the continuous shooting speed and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade.
 さらにまた、実施形態としての第一の撮像装置においては、キャパシタの放電期間中においてもキャパシタに充電が行われる。
 これにより、レリーズを開始可能となるまでの待ち期間の短縮化が図られる。
 従って、連写速度の向上を図ることができる。
Furthermore, in the first image pickup apparatus as the embodiment, the capacitor is charged even during the discharge period of the capacitor.
As a result, the waiting period until the release can be started can be shortened.
Therefore, the continuous shooting speed can be improved.
 実施形態としての第一の制御方法は、撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備える撮像装置における制御方法であって、制御部が、開閉羽根の走行モードとして、モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う制御方法である。
 このような第一の制御方法によっても、上記した第一の撮像装置と同様の作用及び効果を得ることができる。
The first control method as an embodiment is an opening / closing blade that travels in a direction of opening / closing an opening through which incident light passing through an imaging surface passes, a motor provided that can transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade, and opening / closing. This is a control method in an imaging device including a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the blades and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blades. This is a control method for switching modes between a plurality of driving modes having different power consumptions.
Even with such a first control method, the same operations and effects as those of the first imaging device described above can be obtained.
 また、実施形態としての第二の撮像装置(同1)は、撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向である開閉方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、制御部は、開閉羽根の走行モードとして、開閉羽根の走行速度が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行うものである。
 これにより、モータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、開閉羽根の走行速度が速い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替えが可能とされる。
 従って、モータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることが可能な走行モードにより開閉羽根を走行させることができる。すなわち、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることができる。
Further, the second imaging device (same as 1) as the embodiment has an opening / closing blade that travels in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction of opening / closing the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, and traveling power to the opening / closing blade. It is provided with a motor provided so as to be able to transmit, a traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blades, and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blades. , The mode is switched between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades are different.
As a result, the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring can be switched from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is high to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low.
Therefore, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, the opening / closing blades can be traveled in a traveling mode capable of improving quietness and extending the life of the blade opening / closing device. That is, it is possible to improve the quietness and extend the life of the blade opening / closing device.
 実施形態としての第二の制御方法は、撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向である開閉方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備える撮像装置における制御方法であって、制御部が、開閉羽根の走行モードとして、開閉羽根の走行速度が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う制御方法である。
 このような第二の制御方法によっても、上記した第二の撮像装置と同様の作用及び効果を得ることができる。
The second control method as an embodiment is provided with an opening / closing blade that travels in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction of opening / closing the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface, and a traveling power that can be transmitted to the opening / closing blade. This is a control method in an imaging device including a motor, a traveling spring provided so as to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blades, and a control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blades. As a mode, it is a control method for switching between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speeds of the opening / closing blades are different.
The same operation and effect as the above-mentioned second imaging device can also be obtained by such a second control method.
 また、実施形態としての第三の撮像装置(同1)は、開口を開閉する開閉方向へ動作される開閉羽根と、駆動電流が供給されるコイル(同31)とコイルへの通電に伴って回転されるマグネット(同32)とマグネットの回転に伴って回転されるローターギヤ(同33)とを有するモータ(磁気駆動部27)と、ローターギヤに噛合される駆動ギヤ(同35)を有しマグネットと反対方向へ同期して回動される駆動体(同34)と、駆動体を介して開閉羽根に開閉方向における一方への付勢力を付与する走行バネ(同40)とを備え、開閉羽根が駆動体の回動動作に伴って開閉方向へ動作される羽根開閉ユニット(羽根開閉装置11)と、開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部(同95)と、を備え、制御部は、開閉羽根の走行モードとして、モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行うものである。
 上記構成による羽根開閉ユニットにおいては、コイルへの通電に伴って発生するモータの駆動力と駆動体における走行バネの付勢力とによって開閉羽根を走行させることが可能になる。また、上記の制御部により、このようにモータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、モータの消費電力が高い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替え、すなわち、開閉羽根の走行速度が速い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替えが可能とされる。
 従って、モータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることが可能な走行モードにより開閉羽根を走行させることができる。すなわち、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることができる。
Further, in the third imaging device (1) as the embodiment, the opening / closing blades operated in the opening / closing direction for opening / closing the opening, the coil (31) to which the driving current is supplied, and the coil are energized. It has a motor (magnetic drive unit 27) having a magnet to be rotated (32) and a rotor gear (33) to be rotated with the rotation of the magnet, and a drive gear (35) to be meshed with the rotor gear. It is equipped with a drive body (34) that rotates synchronously in the direction opposite to the magnet, and a traveling spring (40) that applies urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction to the opening / closing blades via the driving body. The control unit includes a blade opening / closing unit (blade opening / closing device 11) in which the opening / closing blades are operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotation operation of the drive body, and a control unit (95) for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blades. As the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade, the mode is switched between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different.
In the blade opening / closing unit having the above configuration, the opening / closing blade can be driven by the driving force of the motor generated by energizing the coil and the urging force of the traveling spring in the driving body. Further, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring by the above control unit, the switching from the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is high to the traveling mode in which the power consumption of the motor is low, that is, the opening / closing blades It is possible to switch from a running mode with a high running speed to a running mode with a low running speed.
Therefore, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, the opening / closing blades can be traveled in a traveling mode capable of improving quietness and extending the life of the blade opening / closing device. That is, it is possible to improve the quietness and extend the life of the blade opening / closing device.
 さらに、実施形態の第四の撮像装置(同1)は、開口を開閉する開閉方向へ動作される開閉羽根と、駆動電流が供給されるコイルとコイルへの通電に伴って回転されるマグネットとマグネットの回転に伴って回転されるローターギヤとを有するモータと、ローターギヤに噛合される駆動ギヤを有しマグネットと反対方向へ同期して回動される駆動体と、駆動体を介して開閉羽根に開閉方向における一方への付勢力を付与する走行バネとを備え、開閉羽根が駆動体の回動動作に伴って開閉方向へ動作される羽根開閉ユニットと、開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、制御部は、開閉羽根の走行モードとして、開閉羽根の走行速度が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行うものである。
 上記構成による羽根開閉ユニットにおいては、コイルへの通電に伴って発生するモータの駆動力と駆動体における走行バネの付勢力とによって開閉羽根を走行させることが可能になる。また、上記の制御部により、このようにモータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、開閉羽根の走行速度が速い走行モードから低い走行モードへの切り替えが可能とされる。
 従って、モータとバネの双方で開閉羽根を駆動可能とされた撮像装置について、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることが可能な走行モードにより開閉羽根を走行させることができる。すなわち、静音性の向上及び羽根開閉装置の長寿命化を図ることができる。
Further, the fourth imaging device (1) of the embodiment includes an opening / closing blade that is operated in the opening / closing direction to open / close the opening, a coil to which a driving current is supplied, and a magnet that is rotated by energizing the coil. A motor having a rotor gear that is rotated with the rotation of the magnet, a drive body that has a drive gear meshed with the rotor gear and is rotated in the opposite direction to the magnet, and opening and closing via the drive body. A blade opening / closing unit that is provided with a traveling spring that applies an urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction of the blades, and the opening / closing blades are operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotational operation of the drive body, and a control that controls the traveling of the opening / closing blades. The control unit is provided with a unit, and as a traveling mode of the opening / closing blade, the mode is switched between a plurality of traveling modes having different traveling speeds of the opening / closing blade.
In the blade opening / closing unit having the above configuration, the opening / closing blade can be driven by the driving force of the motor generated by energizing the coil and the urging force of the traveling spring in the driving body. Further, the above-mentioned control unit makes it possible to switch the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring from the traveling mode in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blades is fast to the traveling mode in which the traveling speed is low. ..
Therefore, with respect to the image pickup device in which the opening / closing blades can be driven by both the motor and the spring, the opening / closing blades can be traveled in a traveling mode capable of improving quietness and extending the life of the blade opening / closing device. That is, it is possible to improve the quietness and extend the life of the blade opening / closing device.
 なお、本明細書に記載された効果はあくまでも例示であって限定されるものではなく、また他の効果があってもよい。
It should be noted that the effects described in the present specification are merely examples and are not limited, and other effects may be obtained.
<4.本技術>

 なお、本技術は、以下のような構成にすることもできる。
(1)
 撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、
 前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、
 前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、
 前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、
 前記制御部は、
 前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う
 撮像装置。
(2)
 前記モータの駆動電力源となるキャパシタを備えた
 前記(1)に記載の撮像装置。
(3)
 前記制御部は、
 前記消費電力が異なる走行モードとして第一走行モードと第二走行モードを有し、
 前記第一走行モードは、前記モータと前記走行バネの双方が前記走行動力を伝達するモードであり、前記第二走行モードは、前記走行バネが前記走行動力を伝達するモードであって前記モータの消費電力が前記第一走行モードよりも低いモードである
 前記(2)に記載の撮像装置。
(4)
 前記モータの動力により前記走行バネが蓄勢され、
 前記制御部は、
 前記消費電力が異なる走行モードとして第一走行モードと第二走行モードを有し、
 前記第一走行モードは、前記キャパシタの充電回数が前記第二走行モードよりも少ないモードである
 前記(2)又は(3)に記載の撮像装置。
(5)
 前記制御部は、
 前記開閉羽根の走行速度、連写速度、シャッタースピードの何れかのパラメータに基づいて前記走行モードを選択する
 前記(2)から(4)の何れかに記載の撮像装置。
(6)
 前記制御部は、
 ストロボ同調速度としてのシャッタースピードのパラメータに基づいて前記走行モードを選択する
 前記(5)に記載の撮像装置。
(7)
 前記制御部は、
 前記走行モードとして、第一モードと前記第一モードよりも前記モータの消費電力が低い第二モードとを有すると共に、
 前記開閉羽根の走行速度を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず、連写速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合は、前記走行モードとして前記第二モードを選択する
 前記(2)から(6)の何れかに記載の撮像装置。
(8)
 前記制御部は、
 前記走行モードとして、第一モードと前記第一モードよりも前記モータの消費電力が低い第二モードとを有すると共に、
 連写速度を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず、前記開閉羽根の走行速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合は、前記走行モードとして前記第一モードを選択する
 前記(2)から(7)の何れかに記載の撮像装置。
(9)
 前記制御部は、
 前記走行モードの切り替えとは別の制御として、前記キャパシタの充電時間を調整する制御を行う
 前記(2)から(8)の何れかに記載の撮像装置。
(10)
 前記制御部は、
 前記撮像装置の動作電力源であるバッテリの残量に基づき前記キャパシタの充電電流を調整する制御を行う
 前記(9)に記載の撮像装置。
(11)
 前記制御部は、
 前記キャパシタの充電電圧を調整する制御を行う
 前記(9)又は(10)に記載の撮像装置。
(12)
 前記制御部は、
 前記モータの駆動電流を調整する制御を行う
 前記(9)から(11)の何れかに記載の撮像装置。
(13)
 前記キャパシタの放電期間中においても前記キャパシタに充電が行われる
 前記(2)から(12)の何れかに記載の撮像装置。
<4. This technology>

The present technology can also be configured as follows.
(1)
An opening / closing blade that travels in the direction of opening / closing the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes.
A motor provided so as to be able to transmit running power to the opening / closing blades,
A traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade,
A control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade is provided.
The control unit
An image pickup device that switches between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
(2)
The imaging device according to (1) above, which includes a capacitor that serves as a driving power source for the motor.
(3)
The control unit
It has a first driving mode and a second driving mode as driving modes having different power consumption.
The first traveling mode is a mode in which both the motor and the traveling spring transmit the traveling power, and the second traveling mode is a mode in which the traveling spring transmits the traveling power of the motor. The imaging device according to (2), wherein the power consumption is lower than that of the first traveling mode.
(4)
The traveling spring is stored by the power of the motor,
The control unit
It has a first driving mode and a second driving mode as driving modes having different power consumption.
The imaging device according to (2) or (3), wherein the first traveling mode is a mode in which the number of times the capacitor is charged is less than that of the second traveling mode.
(5)
The control unit
The imaging device according to any one of (2) to (4), wherein the traveling mode is selected based on any of the parameters of the traveling speed, the continuous shooting speed, and the shutter speed of the opening / closing blade.
(6)
The control unit
The imaging device according to (5) above, wherein the traveling mode is selected based on a parameter of a shutter speed as a strobe synchronization speed.
(7)
The control unit
The traveling mode includes a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode.
When the specification for increasing the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade to a predetermined speed or higher is not specified and the continuous shooting speed is set to be automatically selected, the second mode is selected as the traveling mode (2). ) To (6).
(8)
The control unit
The traveling mode includes a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode.
When the continuous shooting speed is not specified to be increased to a predetermined speed or higher and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is set to be automatically selected, the first mode is selected as the traveling mode (2). ) To (7).
(9)
The control unit
The imaging device according to any one of (2) to (8) above, wherein a control for adjusting the charging time of the capacitor is performed as a control different from the switching of the traveling mode.
(10)
The control unit
The imaging device according to (9), wherein the charging current of the capacitor is controlled to be adjusted based on the remaining amount of the battery which is the operating power source of the imaging device.
(11)
The control unit
The imaging device according to (9) or (10), which controls the adjustment of the charging voltage of the capacitor.
(12)
The control unit
The imaging device according to any one of (9) to (11) above, which controls to adjust the drive current of the motor.
(13)
The imaging device according to any one of (2) to (12) above, wherein the capacitor is charged even during the discharge period of the capacitor.
 1 撮像装置、4 シャッター釦、3 フラッシュ(ストロボ)、10 光学系、11 羽根開閉装置(羽根開閉ユニット)、12 撮像素子、13a 開口、15 開閉羽根、27 磁気駆動部(モータ)、31 コイル、32 マグネット、33 ローターギヤ、34 駆動体、35 駆動ギヤ、40 走行バネ、56 電磁石、95 制御部、96 ドライバ部、97 操作部、98 バッテリ99 シャッターモータドライバ部、100 バネ用ドライバ部、101 DC/DCコンバータ、102 キャパシタ、103 ドライバIC、104 制御回路 1 image pickup device, 4 shutter button, 3 flash (strobe), 10 optical system, 11 blade opening / closing device (blade opening / closing unit), 12 imaging element, 13a opening, 15 opening / closing blade, 27 magnetic drive unit (motor), 31 coil, 32 magnet, 33 rotor gear, 34 drive body, 35 drive gear, 40 running spring, 56 electromagnet, 95 control unit, 96 driver unit, 97 operation unit, 98 battery 99 shutter motor driver unit, 100 spring driver unit, 101 DC / DC converter, 102 capacitor, 103 driver IC, 104 control circuit

Claims (18)

  1.  撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、
     前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、
     前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、
     前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、
     前記制御部は、
     前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う
     撮像装置。
    An opening / closing blade that travels in the direction of opening / closing the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes.
    A motor provided so as to be able to transmit running power to the opening / closing blades,
    A traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade,
    A control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade is provided.
    The control unit
    An image pickup device that switches between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
  2.  前記モータの駆動電力源となるキャパシタを備えた
     請求項1に記載の撮像装置。
    The imaging device according to claim 1, further comprising a capacitor that serves as a driving power source for the motor.
  3.  前記制御部は、
     前記消費電力が異なる走行モードとして第一走行モードと第二走行モードを有し、
     前記第一走行モードは、前記モータと前記走行バネの双方が前記走行動力を伝達するモードであり、前記第二走行モードは、前記走行バネが前記走行動力を伝達するモードであって前記モータの消費電力が前記第一走行モードよりも低いモードである
     請求項2に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit
    It has a first driving mode and a second driving mode as driving modes having different power consumption.
    The first traveling mode is a mode in which both the motor and the traveling spring transmit the traveling power, and the second traveling mode is a mode in which the traveling spring transmits the traveling power of the motor. The imaging device according to claim 2, wherein the power consumption is lower than that of the first traveling mode.
  4.  前記モータの動力により前記走行バネが蓄勢され、
     前記制御部は、
     前記消費電力が異なる走行モードとして第一走行モードと第二走行モードを有し、
     前記第一走行モードは、前記キャパシタの充電回数が前記第二走行モードよりも少ないモードである
     請求項2に記載の撮像装置。
    The traveling spring is stored by the power of the motor,
    The control unit
    It has a first driving mode and a second driving mode as driving modes having different power consumption.
    The imaging device according to claim 2, wherein the first traveling mode is a mode in which the number of times the capacitor is charged is less than that of the second traveling mode.
  5.  前記制御部は、
     前記開閉羽根の走行速度、連写速度、シャッタースピードの何れかのパラメータに基づいて前記走行モードを選択する
     請求項2に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit
    The imaging device according to claim 2, wherein the traveling mode is selected based on any of the parameters of the traveling speed, the continuous shooting speed, and the shutter speed of the opening / closing blade.
  6.  前記制御部は、
     ストロボ同調速度としてのシャッタースピードのパラメータに基づいて前記走行モードを選択する
     請求項5に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit
    The imaging device according to claim 5, wherein the traveling mode is selected based on a parameter of a shutter speed as a strobe synchronization speed.
  7.  前記制御部は、
     前記走行モードとして、第一モードと前記第一モードよりも前記モータの消費電力が低い第二モードとを有すると共に、
     前記開閉羽根の走行速度を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず、連写速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合は、前記走行モードとして前記第二モードを選択する
     請求項2に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit
    The traveling mode includes a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode.
    2. When the specification for increasing the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade to a predetermined speed or higher is not specified and the continuous shooting speed is set to be automatically selected, the second mode is selected as the traveling mode. The imaging apparatus according to.
  8.  前記制御部は、
     前記走行モードとして、第一モードと前記第一モードよりも前記モータの消費電力が低い第二モードとを有すると共に、
     連写速度を所定速度以上に高める指定が行われておらず、前記開閉羽根の走行速度を自動選択する設定が行われている場合は、前記走行モードとして前記第一モードを選択する
     請求項2に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit
    The traveling mode includes a first mode and a second mode in which the power consumption of the motor is lower than that of the first mode.
    2. If the continuous shooting speed is not specified to be increased to a predetermined speed or higher and the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is set to be automatically selected, the first mode is selected as the traveling mode. The imaging apparatus according to.
  9.  前記制御部は、
     前記走行モードの切り替えとは別の制御として、前記キャパシタの充電時間を調整する制御を行う
     請求項2に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit
    The imaging device according to claim 2, wherein a control for adjusting the charging time of the capacitor is performed as a control different from the switching of the traveling mode.
  10.  前記制御部は、
     前記撮像装置の動作電力源であるバッテリの残量に基づき前記キャパシタの充電電流を調整する制御を行う
     請求項9に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit
    The imaging device according to claim 9, wherein control is performed to adjust the charging current of the capacitor based on the remaining amount of the battery which is the operating power source of the imaging device.
  11.  前記制御部は、
     前記キャパシタの充電電圧を調整する制御を行う
     請求項9に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit
    The imaging device according to claim 9, wherein control is performed to adjust the charging voltage of the capacitor.
  12.  前記制御部は、
     前記モータの駆動電流を調整する制御を行う
     請求項9に記載の撮像装置。
    The control unit
    The imaging device according to claim 9, wherein control is performed to adjust the drive current of the motor.
  13.  前記キャパシタの放電期間中においても前記キャパシタに充電が行われる
     請求項2に記載の撮像装置。
    The imaging device according to claim 2, wherein the capacitor is charged even during the discharge period of the capacitor.
  14.  撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、
     前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、
     前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、
     前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備える撮像装置における制御方法であって、
     前記制御部が、
     前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う
     制御方法。
    An opening / closing blade that travels in the direction of opening / closing the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes.
    A motor provided so as to be able to transmit running power to the opening / closing blades,
    A traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade,
    A control method in an imaging device including a control unit that controls traveling of the opening / closing blades.
    The control unit
    A control method for switching between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
  15.  撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向である開閉方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、
     前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、
     前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、
     前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、
     前記制御部は、
     前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記開閉羽根の走行速度が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う
     撮像装置。
    An opening / closing blade that travels in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction in which the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, is opened / closed.
    A motor provided so as to be able to transmit running power to the opening / closing blades,
    A traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade,
    A control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade is provided.
    The control unit
    As the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade, an imaging device that switches modes between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is different.
  16.  撮像面への入射光が通過する開口を開閉する方向である開閉方向に走行動作する開閉羽根と、
     前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられたモータと、
     前記開閉羽根に対し走行動力を伝達可能に設けられた走行バネと、
     前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備える撮像装置における制御方法であって、
     前記制御部が、
     前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記開閉羽根の走行速度が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う
     制御方法。
    An opening / closing blade that travels in the opening / closing direction, which is the direction in which the opening through which the incident light passing through the imaging surface passes, is opened / closed.
    A motor provided so as to be able to transmit running power to the opening / closing blades,
    A traveling spring provided so as to be able to transmit traveling power to the opening / closing blade,
    A control method in an imaging device including a control unit that controls traveling of the opening / closing blades.
    The control unit
    As a traveling mode of the opening / closing blade, a control method for switching a mode between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is different.
  17.  開口を開閉する開閉方向へ動作される開閉羽根と、
     駆動電流が供給されるコイルと前記コイルへの通電に伴って回転されるマグネットと前記マグネットの回転に伴って回転されるローターギヤとを有するモータと、
     前記ローターギヤに噛合される駆動ギヤを有し前記マグネットと反対方向へ同期して回動される駆動体と、
     前記駆動体を介して前記開閉羽根に前記開閉方向における一方への付勢力を付与する走行バネとを備え、
     前記開閉羽根が前記駆動体の回動動作に伴って前記開閉方向へ動作される羽根開閉ユニットと、
     前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、
     前記制御部は、
     前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記モータの消費電力が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う
     撮像装置。
    Opening and closing blades that operate in the opening and closing direction to open and close the opening,
    A motor having a coil to which a drive current is supplied, a magnet that is rotated by energizing the coil, and a rotor gear that is rotated by the rotation of the magnet.
    A drive body having a drive gear meshed with the rotor gear and rotating synchronously in the direction opposite to the magnet.
    The opening / closing blade is provided with a traveling spring that applies an urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction via the driving body.
    A blade opening / closing unit in which the opening / closing blades are operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotational operation of the drive body.
    A control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade is provided.
    The control unit
    An image pickup device that switches between a plurality of traveling modes in which the power consumption of the motor is different as the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade.
  18.  開口を開閉する開閉方向へ動作される開閉羽根と、
     駆動電流が供給されるコイルと前記コイルへの通電に伴って回転されるマグネットと前記マグネットの回転に伴って回転されるローターギヤとを有するモータと、
     前記ローターギヤに噛合される駆動ギヤを有し前記マグネットと反対方向へ同期して回動される駆動体と、
     前記駆動体を介して前記開閉羽根に前記開閉方向における一方への付勢力を付与する走行バネとを備え、
     前記開閉羽根が前記駆動体の回動動作に伴って前記開閉方向へ動作される羽根開閉ユニットと、
     前記開閉羽根の走行制御を行う制御部と、を備え、
     前記制御部は、
     前記開閉羽根の走行モードとして、前記開閉羽根の走行速度が異なる複数の走行モード間でモード切り替えを行う
     撮像装置。
    Opening and closing blades that operate in the opening and closing direction to open and close the opening,
    A motor having a coil to which a drive current is supplied, a magnet that is rotated by energizing the coil, and a rotor gear that is rotated by the rotation of the magnet.
    A drive body having a drive gear meshed with the rotor gear and rotating synchronously in the direction opposite to the magnet.
    The opening / closing blade is provided with a traveling spring that applies an urging force to one side in the opening / closing direction via the driving body.
    A blade opening / closing unit in which the opening / closing blades are operated in the opening / closing direction in accordance with the rotational operation of the drive body.
    A control unit for controlling the traveling of the opening / closing blade is provided.
    The control unit
    As the traveling mode of the opening / closing blade, an imaging device that switches modes between a plurality of traveling modes in which the traveling speed of the opening / closing blade is different.
PCT/JP2020/026459 2019-10-02 2020-07-06 Imaging device and control method WO2021065134A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021550347A JPWO2021065134A1 (en) 2019-10-02 2020-07-06

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019182036 2019-10-02
JP2019-182036 2019-10-02

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021065134A1 true WO2021065134A1 (en) 2021-04-08

Family

ID=75337980

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/026459 WO2021065134A1 (en) 2019-10-02 2020-07-06 Imaging device and control method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2021065134A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2021065134A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5563520U (en) * 1978-10-25 1980-04-30
JP2012022025A (en) * 2010-07-12 2012-02-02 Seiko Precision Inc Focal plane shutter and optical device
WO2018230172A1 (en) * 2017-06-14 2018-12-20 ソニー株式会社 Imaging device, shutter driving method
JP2019184834A (en) * 2018-04-11 2019-10-24 キヤノン株式会社 Shutter device, imaging apparatus, and shutter device control method

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5563520U (en) * 1978-10-25 1980-04-30
JP2012022025A (en) * 2010-07-12 2012-02-02 Seiko Precision Inc Focal plane shutter and optical device
WO2018230172A1 (en) * 2017-06-14 2018-12-20 ソニー株式会社 Imaging device, shutter driving method
JP2019184834A (en) * 2018-04-11 2019-10-24 キヤノン株式会社 Shutter device, imaging apparatus, and shutter device control method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2021065134A1 (en) 2021-04-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7637675B2 (en) Imaging apparatus and method for controlling the same
US7753601B2 (en) Mechanical shutter control method and image sensing apparatus
JP5414463B2 (en) Focal plane shutter device and imaging device
EP3142348B1 (en) Imaging device
US7374353B2 (en) Light control apparatus and optical apparatus
US20100027987A1 (en) Shutter device and image pickup apparatus
JP2011095687A5 (en)
JP5534679B2 (en) Shutter device and imaging device
US9257880B2 (en) Camera, control apparatus for cam drive mechanism and control method for cam drive mechanism
JP2008176062A (en) Light quantity adjusting device and imaging apparatus
JP5787659B2 (en) Imaging device
JP2008176309A (en) Imaging apparatus
WO2021065134A1 (en) Imaging device and control method
JP2008175920A (en) Imaging device
JP6500218B2 (en) Imaging device
JP2011013539A (en) Shutter device and digital camera
JP7095695B2 (en) Image pickup device, shutter drive method
US20120262807A1 (en) Lens barrel and image capturing apparatus
JP5366397B2 (en) Shutter device and imaging device
JP2008256844A (en) Imaging apparatus and its control method
JP2007212645A (en) Light quantity control device
JP4034412B2 (en) Electronic imaging device
WO2022014211A1 (en) Blade opening/closing device and imaging device
JP2013195904A (en) Imaging apparatus
WO2021065149A1 (en) Blade opening/closing device and imaging device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20870768

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021550347

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20870768

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1